blob: c46587f07ecbe9073c76b59f680be1ffb42f8898 [file] [log] [blame]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02001 ----------------------
2 HAProxy
3 Configuration Manual
4 ----------------------
Willy Tarreau75934a12010-03-30 09:50:08 +02005 version 1.4.3
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006 willy tarreau
Willy Tarreau75934a12010-03-30 09:50:08 +02007 2010/03/30
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02008
9
10This document covers the configuration language as implemented in the version
11specified above. It does not provide any hint, example or advice. For such
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +010012documentation, please refer to the Reference Manual or the Architecture Manual.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020013The summary below is meant to help you search sections by name and navigate
14through the document.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +020015
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020016Note to documentation contributors :
17 This document is formated with 80 columns per line, with even number of
18 spaces for indentation and without tabs. Please follow these rules strictly
19 so that it remains easily printable everywhere. If a line needs to be
20 printed verbatim and does not fit, please end each line with a backslash
21 ('\') and continue on next line. If you add sections, please update the
22 summary below for easier searching.
23
24
25Summary
26-------
27
281. Quick reminder about HTTP
291.1. The HTTP transaction model
301.2. HTTP request
311.2.1. The Request line
321.2.2. The request headers
331.3. HTTP response
341.3.1. The Response line
351.3.2. The response headers
36
372. Configuring HAProxy
382.1. Configuration file format
392.2. Time format
40
413. Global parameters
423.1. Process management and security
433.2. Performance tuning
443.3. Debugging
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100453.4. Userlists
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020046
474. Proxies
484.1. Proxy keywords matrix
494.2. Alphabetically sorted keywords reference
50
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +0100515. Server and default-server options
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020052
536. HTTP header manipulation
54
Cyril Bonté7d38afb2010-02-03 20:41:26 +0100557. Using ACLs and pattern extraction
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200567.1. Matching integers
577.2. Matching strings
587.3. Matching regular expressions (regexes)
597.4. Matching IPv4 addresses
607.5. Available matching criteria
617.5.1. Matching at Layer 4 and below
627.5.2. Matching contents at Layer 4
637.5.3. Matching at Layer 7
647.6. Pre-defined ACLs
657.7. Using ACLs to form conditions
Cyril Bonté7d38afb2010-02-03 20:41:26 +0100667.8. Pattern extraction
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020067
688. Logging
698.1. Log levels
708.2. Log formats
718.2.1. Default log format
728.2.2. TCP log format
738.2.3. HTTP log format
748.3. Advanced logging options
758.3.1. Disabling logging of external tests
768.3.2. Logging before waiting for the session to terminate
778.3.3. Raising log level upon errors
788.3.4. Disabling logging of successful connections
798.4. Timing events
808.5. Session state at disconnection
818.6. Non-printable characters
828.7. Capturing HTTP cookies
838.8. Capturing HTTP headers
848.9. Examples of logs
85
869. Statistics and monitoring
879.1. CSV format
889.2. Unix Socket commands
89
90
911. Quick reminder about HTTP
92----------------------------
93
94When haproxy is running in HTTP mode, both the request and the response are
95fully analyzed and indexed, thus it becomes possible to build matching criteria
96on almost anything found in the contents.
97
98However, it is important to understand how HTTP requests and responses are
99formed, and how HAProxy decomposes them. It will then become easier to write
100correct rules and to debug existing configurations.
101
102
1031.1. The HTTP transaction model
104-------------------------------
105
106The HTTP protocol is transaction-driven. This means that each request will lead
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100107to one and only one response. Traditionally, a TCP connection is established
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200108from the client to the server, a request is sent by the client on the
109connection, the server responds and the connection is closed. A new request
110will involve a new connection :
111
112 [CON1] [REQ1] ... [RESP1] [CLO1] [CON2] [REQ2] ... [RESP2] [CLO2] ...
113
114In this mode, called the "HTTP close" mode, there are as many connection
115establishments as there are HTTP transactions. Since the connection is closed
116by the server after the response, the client does not need to know the content
117length.
118
119Due to the transactional nature of the protocol, it was possible to improve it
120to avoid closing a connection between two subsequent transactions. In this mode
121however, it is mandatory that the server indicates the content length for each
122response so that the client does not wait indefinitely. For this, a special
123header is used: "Content-length". This mode is called the "keep-alive" mode :
124
125 [CON] [REQ1] ... [RESP1] [REQ2] ... [RESP2] [CLO] ...
126
127Its advantages are a reduced latency between transactions, and less processing
128power required on the server side. It is generally better than the close mode,
129but not always because the clients often limit their concurrent connections to
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +0100130a smaller value. HAProxy currently only supports the HTTP keep-alive mode on
131the client side, and transforms it to a close mode on the server side.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200132
133A last improvement in the communications is the pipelining mode. It still uses
134keep-alive, but the client does not wait for the first response to send the
135second request. This is useful for fetching large number of images composing a
136page :
137
138 [CON] [REQ1] [REQ2] ... [RESP1] [RESP2] [CLO] ...
139
140This can obviously have a tremendous benefit on performance because the network
141latency is eliminated between subsequent requests. Many HTTP agents do not
142correctly support pipelining since there is no way to associate a response with
143the corresponding request in HTTP. For this reason, it is mandatory for the
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +0100144server to reply in the exact same order as the requests were received.
145HAProxy supports pipelined requests on the client side and processes them one
146at a time.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200147
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200148
1491.2. HTTP request
150-----------------
151
152First, let's consider this HTTP request :
153
154 Line Contents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100155 number
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200156 1 GET /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2 HTTP/1.1
157 2 Host: www.mydomain.com
158 3 User-agent: my small browser
159 4 Accept: image/jpeg, image/gif
160 5 Accept: image/png
161
162
1631.2.1. The Request line
164-----------------------
165
166Line 1 is the "request line". It is always composed of 3 fields :
167
168 - a METHOD : GET
169 - a URI : /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
170 - a version tag : HTTP/1.1
171
172All of them are delimited by what the standard calls LWS (linear white spaces),
173which are commonly spaces, but can also be tabs or line feeds/carriage returns
174followed by spaces/tabs. The method itself cannot contain any colon (':') and
175is limited to alphabetic letters. All those various combinations make it
176desirable that HAProxy performs the splitting itself rather than leaving it to
177the user to write a complex or inaccurate regular expression.
178
179The URI itself can have several forms :
180
181 - A "relative URI" :
182
183 /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
184
185 It is a complete URL without the host part. This is generally what is
186 received by servers, reverse proxies and transparent proxies.
187
188 - An "absolute URI", also called a "URL" :
189
190 http://192.168.0.12:8080/serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
191
192 It is composed of a "scheme" (the protocol name followed by '://'), a host
193 name or address, optionally a colon (':') followed by a port number, then
194 a relative URI beginning at the first slash ('/') after the address part.
195 This is generally what proxies receive, but a server supporting HTTP/1.1
196 must accept this form too.
197
198 - a star ('*') : this form is only accepted in association with the OPTIONS
199 method and is not relayable. It is used to inquiry a next hop's
200 capabilities.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100201
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200202 - an address:port combination : 192.168.0.12:80
203 This is used with the CONNECT method, which is used to establish TCP
204 tunnels through HTTP proxies, generally for HTTPS, but sometimes for
205 other protocols too.
206
207In a relative URI, two sub-parts are identified. The part before the question
208mark is called the "path". It is typically the relative path to static objects
209on the server. The part after the question mark is called the "query string".
210It is mostly used with GET requests sent to dynamic scripts and is very
211specific to the language, framework or application in use.
212
213
2141.2.2. The request headers
215--------------------------
216
217The headers start at the second line. They are composed of a name at the
218beginning of the line, immediately followed by a colon (':'). Traditionally,
219an LWS is added after the colon but that's not required. Then come the values.
220Multiple identical headers may be folded into one single line, delimiting the
221values with commas, provided that their order is respected. This is commonly
222encountered in the "Cookie:" field. A header may span over multiple lines if
223the subsequent lines begin with an LWS. In the example in 1.2, lines 4 and 5
224define a total of 3 values for the "Accept:" header.
225
226Contrary to a common mis-conception, header names are not case-sensitive, and
227their values are not either if they refer to other header names (such as the
228"Connection:" header).
229
230The end of the headers is indicated by the first empty line. People often say
231that it's a double line feed, which is not exact, even if a double line feed
232is one valid form of empty line.
233
234Fortunately, HAProxy takes care of all these complex combinations when indexing
235headers, checking values and counting them, so there is no reason to worry
236about the way they could be written, but it is important not to accuse an
237application of being buggy if it does unusual, valid things.
238
239Important note:
240 As suggested by RFC2616, HAProxy normalizes headers by replacing line breaks
241 in the middle of headers by LWS in order to join multi-line headers. This
242 is necessary for proper analysis and helps less capable HTTP parsers to work
243 correctly and not to be fooled by such complex constructs.
244
245
2461.3. HTTP response
247------------------
248
249An HTTP response looks very much like an HTTP request. Both are called HTTP
250messages. Let's consider this HTTP response :
251
252 Line Contents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100253 number
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200254 1 HTTP/1.1 200 OK
255 2 Content-length: 350
256 3 Content-Type: text/html
257
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200258As a special case, HTTP supports so called "Informational responses" as status
259codes 1xx. These messages are special in that they don't convey any part of the
260response, they're just used as sort of a signaling message to ask a client to
Willy Tarreau5843d1a2010-02-01 15:13:32 +0100261continue to post its request for instance. In the case of a status 100 response
262the requested information will be carried by the next non-100 response message
263following the informational one. This implies that multiple responses may be
264sent to a single request, and that this only works when keep-alive is enabled
265(1xx messages are HTTP/1.1 only). HAProxy handles these messages and is able to
266correctly forward and skip them, and only process the next non-100 response. As
267such, these messages are neither logged nor transformed, unless explicitly
268state otherwise. Status 101 messages indicate that the protocol is changing
269over the same connection and that haproxy must switch to tunnel mode, just as
270if a CONNECT had occurred. Then the Upgrade header would contain additional
271information about the type of protocol the connection is switching to.
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200272
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200273
2741.3.1. The Response line
275------------------------
276
277Line 1 is the "response line". It is always composed of 3 fields :
278
279 - a version tag : HTTP/1.1
280 - a status code : 200
281 - a reason : OK
282
283The status code is always 3-digit. The first digit indicates a general status :
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200284 - 1xx = informational message to be skipped (eg: 100, 101)
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200285 - 2xx = OK, content is following (eg: 200, 206)
286 - 3xx = OK, no content following (eg: 302, 304)
287 - 4xx = error caused by the client (eg: 401, 403, 404)
288 - 5xx = error caused by the server (eg: 500, 502, 503)
289
290Please refer to RFC2616 for the detailed meaning of all such codes. The
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100291"reason" field is just a hint, but is not parsed by clients. Anything can be
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200292found there, but it's a common practice to respect the well-established
293messages. It can be composed of one or multiple words, such as "OK", "Found",
294or "Authentication Required".
295
296Haproxy may emit the following status codes by itself :
297
298 Code When / reason
299 200 access to stats page, and when replying to monitoring requests
300 301 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
301 302 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
302 303 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
303 400 for an invalid or too large request
304 401 when an authentication is required to perform the action (when
305 accessing the stats page)
306 403 when a request is forbidden by a "block" ACL or "reqdeny" filter
307 408 when the request timeout strikes before the request is complete
308 500 when haproxy encounters an unrecoverable internal error, such as a
309 memory allocation failure, which should never happen
310 502 when the server returns an empty, invalid or incomplete response, or
311 when an "rspdeny" filter blocks the response.
312 503 when no server was available to handle the request, or in response to
313 monitoring requests which match the "monitor fail" condition
314 504 when the response timeout strikes before the server responds
315
316The error 4xx and 5xx codes above may be customized (see "errorloc" in section
3174.2).
318
319
3201.3.2. The response headers
321---------------------------
322
323Response headers work exactly like request headers, and as such, HAProxy uses
324the same parsing function for both. Please refer to paragraph 1.2.2 for more
325details.
326
327
3282. Configuring HAProxy
329----------------------
330
3312.1. Configuration file format
332------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200333
334HAProxy's configuration process involves 3 major sources of parameters :
335
336 - the arguments from the command-line, which always take precedence
337 - the "global" section, which sets process-wide parameters
338 - the proxies sections which can take form of "defaults", "listen",
339 "frontend" and "backend".
340
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100341The configuration file syntax consists in lines beginning with a keyword
342referenced in this manual, optionally followed by one or several parameters
343delimited by spaces. If spaces have to be entered in strings, then they must be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100344preceded by a backslash ('\') to be escaped. Backslashes also have to be
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100345escaped by doubling them.
346
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200347
3482.2. Time format
349----------------
350
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100351Some parameters involve values representing time, such as timeouts. These
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100352values are generally expressed in milliseconds (unless explicitly stated
353otherwise) but may be expressed in any other unit by suffixing the unit to the
354numeric value. It is important to consider this because it will not be repeated
355for every keyword. Supported units are :
356
357 - us : microseconds. 1 microsecond = 1/1000000 second
358 - ms : milliseconds. 1 millisecond = 1/1000 second. This is the default.
359 - s : seconds. 1s = 1000ms
360 - m : minutes. 1m = 60s = 60000ms
361 - h : hours. 1h = 60m = 3600s = 3600000ms
362 - d : days. 1d = 24h = 1440m = 86400s = 86400000ms
363
364
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003653. Global parameters
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200366--------------------
367
368Parameters in the "global" section are process-wide and often OS-specific. They
369are generally set once for all and do not need being changed once correct. Some
370of them have command-line equivalents.
371
372The following keywords are supported in the "global" section :
373
374 * Process management and security
375 - chroot
376 - daemon
377 - gid
378 - group
379 - log
380 - nbproc
381 - pidfile
382 - uid
383 - ulimit-n
384 - user
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200385 - stats
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200386 - node
387 - description
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100388
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200389 * Performance tuning
390 - maxconn
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100391 - maxpipes
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200392 - noepoll
393 - nokqueue
394 - nopoll
395 - nosepoll
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100396 - nosplice
Willy Tarreaufe255b72007-10-14 23:09:26 +0200397 - spread-checks
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200398 - tune.bufsize
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100399 - tune.maxaccept
400 - tune.maxpollevents
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200401 - tune.maxrewrite
Willy Tarreaue803de22010-01-21 17:43:04 +0100402 - tune.rcvbuf.client
403 - tune.rcvbuf.server
404 - tune.sndbuf.client
405 - tune.sndbuf.server
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100406
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200407 * Debugging
408 - debug
409 - quiet
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200410
411
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004123.1. Process management and security
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200413------------------------------------
414
415chroot <jail dir>
416 Changes current directory to <jail dir> and performs a chroot() there before
417 dropping privileges. This increases the security level in case an unknown
418 vulnerability would be exploited, since it would make it very hard for the
419 attacker to exploit the system. This only works when the process is started
420 with superuser privileges. It is important to ensure that <jail_dir> is both
421 empty and unwritable to anyone.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100422
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200423daemon
424 Makes the process fork into background. This is the recommended mode of
425 operation. It is equivalent to the command line "-D" argument. It can be
426 disabled by the command line "-db" argument.
427
428gid <number>
429 Changes the process' group ID to <number>. It is recommended that the group
430 ID is dedicated to HAProxy or to a small set of similar daemons. HAProxy must
431 be started with a user belonging to this group, or with superuser privileges.
432 See also "group" and "uid".
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100433
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200434group <group name>
435 Similar to "gid" but uses the GID of group name <group name> from /etc/group.
436 See also "gid" and "user".
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100437
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +0200438log <address> <facility> [max level [min level]]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200439 Adds a global syslog server. Up to two global servers can be defined. They
440 will receive logs for startups and exits, as well as all logs from proxies
Robert Tsai81ae1952007-12-05 10:47:29 +0100441 configured with "log global".
442
443 <address> can be one of:
444
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +0100445 - An IPv4 address optionally followed by a colon and a UDP port. If
Robert Tsai81ae1952007-12-05 10:47:29 +0100446 no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the standard syslog
447 port).
448
449 - A filesystem path to a UNIX domain socket, keeping in mind
450 considerations for chroot (be sure the path is accessible inside
451 the chroot) and uid/gid (be sure the path is appropriately
452 writeable).
453
454 <facility> must be one of the 24 standard syslog facilities :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200455
456 kern user mail daemon auth syslog lpr news
457 uucp cron auth2 ftp ntp audit alert cron2
458 local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7
459
460 An optional level can be specified to filter outgoing messages. By default,
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +0200461 all messages are sent. If a maximum level is specified, only messages with a
462 severity at least as important as this level will be sent. An optional minimum
463 level can be specified. If it is set, logs emitted with a more severe level
464 than this one will be capped to this level. This is used to avoid sending
465 "emerg" messages on all terminals on some default syslog configurations.
466 Eight levels are known :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200467
468 emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug
469
470nbproc <number>
471 Creates <number> processes when going daemon. This requires the "daemon"
472 mode. By default, only one process is created, which is the recommended mode
473 of operation. For systems limited to small sets of file descriptors per
474 process, it may be needed to fork multiple daemons. USING MULTIPLE PROCESSES
475 IS HARDER TO DEBUG AND IS REALLY DISCOURAGED. See also "daemon".
476
477pidfile <pidfile>
478 Writes pids of all daemons into file <pidfile>. This option is equivalent to
479 the "-p" command line argument. The file must be accessible to the user
480 starting the process. See also "daemon".
481
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200482stats socket <path> [{uid | user} <uid>] [{gid | group} <gid>] [mode <mode>]
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +0200483 [level <level>]
484
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200485 Creates a UNIX socket in stream mode at location <path>. Any previously
486 existing socket will be backed up then replaced. Connections to this socket
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100487 will return various statistics outputs and even allow some commands to be
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +0200488 issued. Please consult section 9.2 "Unix Socket commands" for more details.
489
490 An optional "level" parameter can be specified to restrict the nature of
491 the commands that can be issued on the socket :
492 - "user" is the least privileged level ; only non-sensitive stats can be
493 read, and no change is allowed. It would make sense on systems where it
494 is not easy to restrict access to the socket.
495
496 - "operator" is the default level and fits most common uses. All data can
497 be read, and only non-sensible changes are permitted (eg: clear max
498 counters).
499
500 - "admin" should be used with care, as everything is permitted (eg: clear
501 all counters).
Willy Tarreaua8efd362008-01-03 10:19:15 +0100502
503 On platforms which support it, it is possible to restrict access to this
504 socket by specifying numerical IDs after "uid" and "gid", or valid user and
505 group names after the "user" and "group" keywords. It is also possible to
506 restrict permissions on the socket by passing an octal value after the "mode"
507 keyword (same syntax as chmod). Depending on the platform, the permissions on
508 the socket will be inherited from the directory which hosts it, or from the
509 user the process is started with.
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200510
511stats timeout <timeout, in milliseconds>
512 The default timeout on the stats socket is set to 10 seconds. It is possible
513 to change this value with "stats timeout". The value must be passed in
Willy Tarreaubefdff12007-12-02 22:27:38 +0100514 milliseconds, or be suffixed by a time unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }.
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200515
516stats maxconn <connections>
517 By default, the stats socket is limited to 10 concurrent connections. It is
518 possible to change this value with "stats maxconn".
519
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200520uid <number>
521 Changes the process' user ID to <number>. It is recommended that the user ID
522 is dedicated to HAProxy or to a small set of similar daemons. HAProxy must
523 be started with superuser privileges in order to be able to switch to another
524 one. See also "gid" and "user".
525
526ulimit-n <number>
527 Sets the maximum number of per-process file-descriptors to <number>. By
528 default, it is automatically computed, so it is recommended not to use this
529 option.
530
531user <user name>
532 Similar to "uid" but uses the UID of user name <user name> from /etc/passwd.
533 See also "uid" and "group".
534
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200535node <name>
536 Only letters, digits, hyphen and underscore are allowed, like in DNS names.
537
538 This statement is useful in HA configurations where two or more processes or
539 servers share the same IP address. By setting a different node-name on all
540 nodes, it becomes easy to immediately spot what server is handling the
541 traffic.
542
543description <text>
544 Add a text that describes the instance.
545
546 Please note that it is required to escape certain characters (# for example)
547 and this text is inserted into a html page so you should avoid using
548 "<" and ">" characters.
549
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200550
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005513.2. Performance tuning
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200552-----------------------
553
554maxconn <number>
555 Sets the maximum per-process number of concurrent connections to <number>. It
556 is equivalent to the command-line argument "-n". Proxies will stop accepting
557 connections when this limit is reached. The "ulimit-n" parameter is
558 automatically adjusted according to this value. See also "ulimit-n".
559
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100560maxpipes <number>
561 Sets the maximum per-process number of pipes to <number>. Currently, pipes
562 are only used by kernel-based tcp splicing. Since a pipe contains two file
563 descriptors, the "ulimit-n" value will be increased accordingly. The default
564 value is maxconn/4, which seems to be more than enough for most heavy usages.
565 The splice code dynamically allocates and releases pipes, and can fall back
566 to standard copy, so setting this value too low may only impact performance.
567
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200568noepoll
569 Disables the use of the "epoll" event polling system on Linux. It is
570 equivalent to the command-line argument "-de". The next polling system
571 used will generally be "poll". See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll".
572
573nokqueue
574 Disables the use of the "kqueue" event polling system on BSD. It is
575 equivalent to the command-line argument "-dk". The next polling system
576 used will generally be "poll". See also "nopoll".
577
578nopoll
579 Disables the use of the "poll" event polling system. It is equivalent to the
580 command-line argument "-dp". The next polling system used will be "select".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100581 It should never be needed to disable "poll" since it's available on all
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200582 platforms supported by HAProxy. See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll" and
583 "nokqueue".
584
585nosepoll
586 Disables the use of the "speculative epoll" event polling system on Linux. It
587 is equivalent to the command-line argument "-ds". The next polling system
588 used will generally be "epoll". See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll".
589
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100590nosplice
591 Disables the use of kernel tcp splicing between sockets on Linux. It is
592 equivalent to the command line argument "-dS". Data will then be copied
593 using conventional and more portable recv/send calls. Kernel tcp splicing is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100594 limited to some very recent instances of kernel 2.6. Most versions between
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100595 2.6.25 and 2.6.28 are buggy and will forward corrupted data, so they must not
596 be used. This option makes it easier to globally disable kernel splicing in
597 case of doubt. See also "option splice-auto", "option splice-request" and
598 "option splice-response".
599
Willy Tarreaufe255b72007-10-14 23:09:26 +0200600spread-checks <0..50, in percent>
601 Sometimes it is desirable to avoid sending health checks to servers at exact
602 intervals, for instance when many logical servers are located on the same
603 physical server. With the help of this parameter, it becomes possible to add
604 some randomness in the check interval between 0 and +/- 50%. A value between
605 2 and 5 seems to show good results. The default value remains at 0.
606
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200607tune.bufsize <number>
608 Sets the buffer size to this size (in bytes). Lower values allow more
609 sessions to coexist in the same amount of RAM, and higher values allow some
610 applications with very large cookies to work. The default value is 16384 and
611 can be changed at build time. It is strongly recommended not to change this
612 from the default value, as very low values will break some services such as
613 statistics, and values larger than default size will increase memory usage,
614 possibly causing the system to run out of memory. At least the global maxconn
615 parameter should be decreased by the same factor as this one is increased.
616
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100617tune.maxaccept <number>
618 Sets the maximum number of consecutive accepts that a process may perform on
619 a single wake up. High values give higher priority to high connection rates,
620 while lower values give higher priority to already established connections.
Willy Tarreauf49d1df2009-03-01 08:35:41 +0100621 This value is limited to 100 by default in single process mode. However, in
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100622 multi-process mode (nbproc > 1), it defaults to 8 so that when one process
623 wakes up, it does not take all incoming connections for itself and leaves a
Willy Tarreauf49d1df2009-03-01 08:35:41 +0100624 part of them to other processes. Setting this value to -1 completely disables
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100625 the limitation. It should normally not be needed to tweak this value.
626
627tune.maxpollevents <number>
628 Sets the maximum amount of events that can be processed at once in a call to
629 the polling system. The default value is adapted to the operating system. It
630 has been noticed that reducing it below 200 tends to slightly decrease
631 latency at the expense of network bandwidth, and increasing it above 200
632 tends to trade latency for slightly increased bandwidth.
633
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200634tune.maxrewrite <number>
635 Sets the reserved buffer space to this size in bytes. The reserved space is
636 used for header rewriting or appending. The first reads on sockets will never
637 fill more than bufsize-maxrewrite. Historically it has defaulted to half of
638 bufsize, though that does not make much sense since there are rarely large
639 numbers of headers to add. Setting it too high prevents processing of large
640 requests or responses. Setting it too low prevents addition of new headers
641 to already large requests or to POST requests. It is generally wise to set it
642 to about 1024. It is automatically readjusted to half of bufsize if it is
643 larger than that. This means you don't have to worry about it when changing
644 bufsize.
645
Willy Tarreaue803de22010-01-21 17:43:04 +0100646tune.rcvbuf.client <number>
647tune.rcvbuf.server <number>
648 Forces the kernel socket receive buffer size on the client or the server side
649 to the specified value in bytes. This value applies to all TCP/HTTP frontends
650 and backends. It should normally never be set, and the default size (0) lets
651 the kernel autotune this value depending on the amount of available memory.
652 However it can sometimes help to set it to very low values (eg: 4096) in
653 order to save kernel memory by preventing it from buffering too large amounts
654 of received data. Lower values will significantly increase CPU usage though.
655
656tune.sndbuf.client <number>
657tune.sndbuf.server <number>
658 Forces the kernel socket send buffer size on the client or the server side to
659 the specified value in bytes. This value applies to all TCP/HTTP frontends
660 and backends. It should normally never be set, and the default size (0) lets
661 the kernel autotune this value depending on the amount of available memory.
662 However it can sometimes help to set it to very low values (eg: 4096) in
663 order to save kernel memory by preventing it from buffering too large amounts
664 of received data. Lower values will significantly increase CPU usage though.
665 Another use case is to prevent write timeouts with extremely slow clients due
666 to the kernel waiting for a large part of the buffer to be read before
667 notifying haproxy again.
668
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200669
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006703.3. Debugging
671--------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200672
673debug
674 Enables debug mode which dumps to stdout all exchanges, and disables forking
675 into background. It is the equivalent of the command-line argument "-d". It
676 should never be used in a production configuration since it may prevent full
677 system startup.
678
679quiet
680 Do not display any message during startup. It is equivalent to the command-
681 line argument "-q".
682
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01006833.4. Userlists
684--------------
685It is possible to control access to frontend/backend/listen sections or to
686http stats by allowing only authenticated and authorized users. To do this,
687it is required to create at least one userlist and to define users.
688
689userlist <listname>
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +0100690 Creates new userlist with name <listname>. Many independent userlists can be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100691 used to store authentication & authorization data for independent customers.
692
693group <groupname> [users <user>,<user>,(...)]
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +0100694 Adds group <groupname> to the current userlist. It is also possible to
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100695 attach users to this group by using a comma separated list of names
696 proceeded by "users" keyword.
697
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100698user <username> [password|insecure-password <password>]
699 [groups <group>,<group>,(...)]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100700 Adds user <username> to the current userlist. Both secure (encrypted) and
701 insecure (unencrypted) passwords can be used. Encrypted passwords are
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +0100702 evaluated using the crypt(3) function so depending of the system's
703 capabilities, different algorithms are supported. For example modern Glibc
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100704 based Linux system supports MD5, SHA-256, SHA-512 and of course classic,
705 DES-based method of crypting passwords.
706
707
708 Example:
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100709 userlist L1
710 group G1 users tiger,scott
711 group G2 users xdb,scott
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100712
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100713 user tiger password $6$k6y3o.eP$JlKBx9za9667qe4(...)xHSwRv6J.C0/D7cV91
714 user scott insecure-password elgato
715 user xdb insecure-password hello
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100716
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100717 userlist L2
718 group G1
719 group G2
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100720
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100721 user tiger password $6$k6y3o.eP$JlKBx(...)xHSwRv6J.C0/D7cV91 groups G1
722 user scott insecure-password elgato groups G1,G2
723 user xdb insecure-password hello groups G2
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100724
725 Please note that both lists are functionally identical.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200726
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007274. Proxies
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200728----------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100729
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200730Proxy configuration can be located in a set of sections :
731 - defaults <name>
732 - frontend <name>
733 - backend <name>
734 - listen <name>
735
736A "defaults" section sets default parameters for all other sections following
737its declaration. Those default parameters are reset by the next "defaults"
738section. See below for the list of parameters which can be set in a "defaults"
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100739section. The name is optional but its use is encouraged for better readability.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200740
741A "frontend" section describes a set of listening sockets accepting client
742connections.
743
744A "backend" section describes a set of servers to which the proxy will connect
745to forward incoming connections.
746
747A "listen" section defines a complete proxy with its frontend and backend
748parts combined in one section. It is generally useful for TCP-only traffic.
749
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100750All proxy names must be formed from upper and lower case letters, digits,
751'-' (dash), '_' (underscore) , '.' (dot) and ':' (colon). ACL names are
752case-sensitive, which means that "www" and "WWW" are two different proxies.
753
754Historically, all proxy names could overlap, it just caused troubles in the
755logs. Since the introduction of content switching, it is mandatory that two
756proxies with overlapping capabilities (frontend/backend) have different names.
757However, it is still permitted that a frontend and a backend share the same
758name, as this configuration seems to be commonly encountered.
759
760Right now, two major proxy modes are supported : "tcp", also known as layer 4,
761and "http", also known as layer 7. In layer 4 mode, HAProxy simply forwards
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100762bidirectional traffic between two sides. In layer 7 mode, HAProxy analyzes the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100763protocol, and can interact with it by allowing, blocking, switching, adding,
764modifying, or removing arbitrary contents in requests or responses, based on
765arbitrary criteria.
766
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100767
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007684.1. Proxy keywords matrix
769--------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100770
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200771The following list of keywords is supported. Most of them may only be used in a
772limited set of section types. Some of them are marked as "deprecated" because
773they are inherited from an old syntax which may be confusing or functionally
774limited, and there are new recommended keywords to replace them. Keywords
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100775marked with "(*)" can be optionally inverted using the "no" prefix, eg. "no
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200776option contstats". This makes sense when the option has been enabled by default
Willy Tarreau3842f002009-06-14 11:39:52 +0200777and must be disabled for a specific instance. Such options may also be prefixed
778with "default" in order to restore default settings regardless of what has been
779specified in a previous "defaults" section.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100780
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200781
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100782 keyword defaults frontend listen backend
783------------------------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
784acl - X X X
785appsession - - X X
786backlog X X X -
787balance X - X X
788bind - X X -
789bind-process X X X X
790block - X X X
791capture cookie - X X -
792capture request header - X X -
793capture response header - X X -
794clitimeout (deprecated) X X X -
795contimeout (deprecated) X - X X
796cookie X - X X
797default-server X - X X
798default_backend X X X -
799description - X X X
800disabled X X X X
801dispatch - - X X
802enabled X X X X
803errorfile X X X X
804errorloc X X X X
805errorloc302 X X X X
806-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
807errorloc303 X X X X
808fullconn X - X X
809grace X X X X
810hash-type X - X X
811http-check disable-on-404 X - X X
812http-request - X X X
813id - X X X
814log X X X X
815maxconn X X X -
816mode X X X X
817monitor fail - X X -
818monitor-net X X X -
819monitor-uri X X X -
820option abortonclose (*) X - X X
821option accept-invalid-http-request (*) X X X -
822option accept-invalid-http-response (*) X - X X
823option allbackups (*) X - X X
824option checkcache (*) X - X X
825option clitcpka (*) X X X -
826option contstats (*) X X X -
827option dontlog-normal (*) X X X -
828option dontlognull (*) X X X -
829option forceclose (*) X X X X
830-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
831option forwardfor X X X X
832option http-server-close (*) X X X X
833option http-use-proxy-header (*) X X X -
834option httpchk X - X X
835option httpclose (*) X X X X
836option httplog X X X X
837option http_proxy (*) X X X X
838option independant-streams (*) X X X X
839option log-health-checks (*) X - X X
840option log-separate-errors (*) X X X -
841option logasap (*) X X X -
842option mysql-check X - X X
843option nolinger (*) X X X X
844option originalto X X X X
845option persist (*) X - X X
846option redispatch (*) X - X X
847option smtpchk X - X X
848option socket-stats (*) X X X -
849option splice-auto (*) X X X X
850option splice-request (*) X X X X
851option splice-response (*) X X X X
852option srvtcpka (*) X - X X
853option ssl-hello-chk X - X X
854-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
855option tcp-smart-accept (*) X X X -
856option tcp-smart-connect (*) X - X X
857option tcpka X X X X
858option tcplog X X X X
859option transparent (*) X - X X
860persist rdp-cookie X - X X
861rate-limit sessions X X X -
862redirect - X X X
863redisp (deprecated) X - X X
864redispatch (deprecated) X - X X
865reqadd - X X X
866reqallow - X X X
867reqdel - X X X
868reqdeny - X X X
869reqiallow - X X X
870reqidel - X X X
871reqideny - X X X
872reqipass - X X X
873reqirep - X X X
874reqisetbe - X X X
875reqitarpit - X X X
876reqpass - X X X
877reqrep - X X X
878-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
879reqsetbe - X X X
880reqtarpit - X X X
881retries X - X X
882rspadd - X X X
883rspdel - X X X
884rspdeny - X X X
885rspidel - X X X
886rspideny - X X X
887rspirep - X X X
888rsprep - X X X
889server - - X X
890source X - X X
891srvtimeout (deprecated) X - X X
892stats auth X - X X
893stats enable X - X X
894stats hide-version X - X X
895stats realm X - X X
896stats refresh X - X X
897stats scope X - X X
898stats show-desc X - X X
899stats show-legends X - X X
900stats show-node X - X X
901stats uri X - X X
902-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
903stick match - - X X
904stick on - - X X
905stick store-request - - X X
906stick-table - - X X
907tcp-request content accept - X X -
908tcp-request content reject - X X -
909tcp-request inspect-delay - X X -
910timeout check X - X X
911timeout client X X X -
912timeout clitimeout (deprecated) X X X -
913timeout connect X - X X
914timeout contimeout (deprecated) X - X X
915timeout http-keep-alive X X X X
916timeout http-request X X X X
917timeout queue X - X X
918timeout server X - X X
919timeout srvtimeout (deprecated) X - X X
920timeout tarpit X X X X
921transparent (deprecated) X - X X
922use_backend - X X -
923------------------------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
924 keyword defaults frontend listen backend
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200925
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100926
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02009274.2. Alphabetically sorted keywords reference
928---------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100929
930This section provides a description of each keyword and its usage.
931
932
933acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...
934 Declare or complete an access list.
935 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
936 no | yes | yes | yes
937 Example:
938 acl invalid_src src 0.0.0.0/7 224.0.0.0/3
939 acl invalid_src src_port 0:1023
940 acl local_dst hdr(host) -i localhost
941
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200942 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100943
944
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100945appsession <cookie> len <length> timeout <holdtime>
946 [request-learn] [prefix] [mode <path-parameters|query-string>]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100947 Define session stickiness on an existing application cookie.
948 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
949 no | no | yes | yes
950 Arguments :
951 <cookie> this is the name of the cookie used by the application and which
952 HAProxy will have to learn for each new session.
953
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100954 <length> this is the max number of characters that will be memorized and
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100955 checked in each cookie value.
956
957 <holdtime> this is the time after which the cookie will be removed from
958 memory if unused. If no unit is specified, this time is in
959 milliseconds.
960
Cyril Bontébf47aeb2009-10-15 00:15:40 +0200961 request-learn
962 If this option is specified, then haproxy will be able to learn
963 the cookie found in the request in case the server does not
964 specify any in response. This is typically what happens with
965 PHPSESSID cookies, or when haproxy's session expires before
966 the application's session and the correct server is selected.
967 It is recommended to specify this option to improve reliability.
968
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100969 prefix When this option is specified, haproxy will match on the cookie
970 prefix (or URL parameter prefix). The appsession value is the
971 data following this prefix.
972
973 Example :
974 appsession ASPSESSIONID len 64 timeout 3h prefix
975
976 This will match the cookie ASPSESSIONIDXXXX=XXXXX,
977 the appsession value will be XXXX=XXXXX.
978
979 mode This option allows to change the URL parser mode.
980 2 modes are currently supported :
981 - path-parameters :
982 The parser looks for the appsession in the path parameters
983 part (each parameter is separated by a semi-colon), which is
984 convenient for JSESSIONID for example.
985 This is the default mode if the option is not set.
986 - query-string :
987 In this mode, the parser will look for the appsession in the
988 query string.
989
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100990 When an application cookie is defined in a backend, HAProxy will check when
991 the server sets such a cookie, and will store its value in a table, and
992 associate it with the server's identifier. Up to <length> characters from
993 the value will be retained. On each connection, haproxy will look for this
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100994 cookie both in the "Cookie:" headers, and as a URL parameter (depending on
995 the mode used). If a known value is found, the client will be directed to the
996 server associated with this value. Otherwise, the load balancing algorithm is
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100997 applied. Cookies are automatically removed from memory when they have been
998 unused for a duration longer than <holdtime>.
999
1000 The definition of an application cookie is limited to one per backend.
1001
1002 Example :
1003 appsession JSESSIONID len 52 timeout 3h
1004
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01001005 See also : "cookie", "capture cookie", "balance", "stick" and "stick-table".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001006
1007
Willy Tarreauc73ce2b2008-01-06 10:55:10 +01001008backlog <conns>
1009 Give hints to the system about the approximate listen backlog desired size
1010 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1011 yes | yes | yes | no
1012 Arguments :
1013 <conns> is the number of pending connections. Depending on the operating
1014 system, it may represent the number of already acknowledged
1015 connections, of non-acknowledged ones, or both.
1016
1017 In order to protect against SYN flood attacks, one solution is to increase
1018 the system's SYN backlog size. Depending on the system, sometimes it is just
1019 tunable via a system parameter, sometimes it is not adjustable at all, and
1020 sometimes the system relies on hints given by the application at the time of
1021 the listen() syscall. By default, HAProxy passes the frontend's maxconn value
1022 to the listen() syscall. On systems which can make use of this value, it can
1023 sometimes be useful to be able to specify a different value, hence this
1024 backlog parameter.
1025
1026 On Linux 2.4, the parameter is ignored by the system. On Linux 2.6, it is
1027 used as a hint and the system accepts up to the smallest greater power of
1028 two, and never more than some limits (usually 32768).
1029
1030 See also : "maxconn" and the target operating system's tuning guide.
1031
1032
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001033balance <algorithm> [ <arguments> ]
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001034balance url_param <param> [check_post [<max_wait>]]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001035 Define the load balancing algorithm to be used in a backend.
1036 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1037 yes | no | yes | yes
1038 Arguments :
1039 <algorithm> is the algorithm used to select a server when doing load
1040 balancing. This only applies when no persistence information
1041 is available, or when a connection is redispatched to another
1042 server. <algorithm> may be one of the following :
1043
1044 roundrobin Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
1045 This is the smoothest and fairest algorithm when the server's
1046 processing time remains equally distributed. This algorithm
1047 is dynamic, which means that server weights may be adjusted
Willy Tarreau9757a382009-10-03 12:56:50 +02001048 on the fly for slow starts for instance. It is limited by
1049 design to 4128 active servers per backend. Note that in some
1050 large farms, when a server becomes up after having been down
1051 for a very short time, it may sometimes take a few hundreds
1052 requests for it to be re-integrated into the farm and start
1053 receiving traffic. This is normal, though very rare. It is
1054 indicated here in case you would have the chance to observe
1055 it, so that you don't worry.
1056
1057 static-rr Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
1058 This algorithm is as similar to roundrobin except that it is
1059 static, which means that changing a server's weight on the
1060 fly will have no effect. On the other hand, it has no design
1061 limitation on the number of servers, and when a server goes
1062 up, it is always immediately reintroduced into the farm, once
1063 the full map is recomputed. It also uses slightly less CPU to
1064 run (around -1%).
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001065
Willy Tarreau2d2a7f82008-03-17 12:07:56 +01001066 leastconn The server with the lowest number of connections receives the
1067 connection. Round-robin is performed within groups of servers
1068 of the same load to ensure that all servers will be used. Use
1069 of this algorithm is recommended where very long sessions are
1070 expected, such as LDAP, SQL, TSE, etc... but is not very well
1071 suited for protocols using short sessions such as HTTP. This
1072 algorithm is dynamic, which means that server weights may be
1073 adjusted on the fly for slow starts for instance.
1074
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001075 source The source IP address is hashed and divided by the total
1076 weight of the running servers to designate which server will
1077 receive the request. This ensures that the same client IP
1078 address will always reach the same server as long as no
1079 server goes down or up. If the hash result changes due to the
1080 number of running servers changing, many clients will be
1081 directed to a different server. This algorithm is generally
1082 used in TCP mode where no cookie may be inserted. It may also
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001083 be used on the Internet to provide a best-effort stickiness
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001084 to clients which refuse session cookies. This algorithm is
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001085 static by default, which means that changing a server's
1086 weight on the fly will have no effect, but this can be
1087 changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001088
1089 uri The left part of the URI (before the question mark) is hashed
1090 and divided by the total weight of the running servers. The
1091 result designates which server will receive the request. This
1092 ensures that a same URI will always be directed to the same
1093 server as long as no server goes up or down. This is used
1094 with proxy caches and anti-virus proxies in order to maximize
1095 the cache hit rate. Note that this algorithm may only be used
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001096 in an HTTP backend. This algorithm is static by default,
1097 which means that changing a server's weight on the fly will
1098 have no effect, but this can be changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001099
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001100 This algorithm support two optional parameters "len" and
1101 "depth", both followed by a positive integer number. These
1102 options may be helpful when it is needed to balance servers
1103 based on the beginning of the URI only. The "len" parameter
1104 indicates that the algorithm should only consider that many
1105 characters at the beginning of the URI to compute the hash.
1106 Note that having "len" set to 1 rarely makes sense since most
1107 URIs start with a leading "/".
1108
1109 The "depth" parameter indicates the maximum directory depth
1110 to be used to compute the hash. One level is counted for each
1111 slash in the request. If both parameters are specified, the
1112 evaluation stops when either is reached.
1113
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001114 url_param The URL parameter specified in argument will be looked up in
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001115 the query string of each HTTP GET request.
1116
1117 If the modifier "check_post" is used, then an HTTP POST
1118 request entity will be searched for the parameter argument,
1119 when the question mark indicating a query string ('?') is not
1120 present in the URL. Optionally, specify a number of octets to
1121 wait for before attempting to search the message body. If the
1122 entity can not be searched, then round robin is used for each
1123 request. For instance, if your clients always send the LB
1124 parameter in the first 128 bytes, then specify that. The
1125 default is 48. The entity data will not be scanned until the
1126 required number of octets have arrived at the gateway, this
1127 is the minimum of: (default/max_wait, Content-Length or first
1128 chunk length). If Content-Length is missing or zero, it does
1129 not need to wait for more data than the client promised to
1130 send. When Content-Length is present and larger than
1131 <max_wait>, then waiting is limited to <max_wait> and it is
1132 assumed that this will be enough data to search for the
1133 presence of the parameter. In the unlikely event that
1134 Transfer-Encoding: chunked is used, only the first chunk is
1135 scanned. Parameter values separated by a chunk boundary, may
1136 be randomly balanced if at all.
1137
1138 If the parameter is found followed by an equal sign ('=') and
1139 a value, then the value is hashed and divided by the total
1140 weight of the running servers. The result designates which
1141 server will receive the request.
1142
1143 This is used to track user identifiers in requests and ensure
1144 that a same user ID will always be sent to the same server as
1145 long as no server goes up or down. If no value is found or if
1146 the parameter is not found, then a round robin algorithm is
1147 applied. Note that this algorithm may only be used in an HTTP
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001148 backend. This algorithm is static by default, which means
1149 that changing a server's weight on the fly will have no
1150 effect, but this can be changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001151
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001152 hdr(name) The HTTP header <name> will be looked up in each HTTP request.
1153 Just as with the equivalent ACL 'hdr()' function, the header
1154 name in parenthesis is not case sensitive. If the header is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001155 absent or if it does not contain any value, the roundrobin
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001156 algorithm is applied instead.
1157
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001158 An optional 'use_domain_only' parameter is available, for
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001159 reducing the hash algorithm to the main domain part with some
1160 specific headers such as 'Host'. For instance, in the Host
1161 value "haproxy.1wt.eu", only "1wt" will be considered.
1162
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001163 This algorithm is static by default, which means that
1164 changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
1165 but this can be changed using "hash-type".
1166
Emeric Brun736aa232009-06-30 17:56:00 +02001167 rdp-cookie
1168 rdp-cookie(name)
1169 The RDP cookie <name> (or "mstshash" if omitted) will be
1170 looked up and hashed for each incoming TCP request. Just as
1171 with the equivalent ACL 'req_rdp_cookie()' function, the name
1172 is not case-sensitive. This mechanism is useful as a degraded
1173 persistence mode, as it makes it possible to always send the
1174 same user (or the same session ID) to the same server. If the
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001175 cookie is not found, the normal roundrobin algorithm is
Emeric Brun736aa232009-06-30 17:56:00 +02001176 used instead.
1177
1178 Note that for this to work, the frontend must ensure that an
1179 RDP cookie is already present in the request buffer. For this
1180 you must use 'tcp-request content accept' rule combined with
1181 a 'req_rdp_cookie_cnt' ACL.
1182
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001183 This algorithm is static by default, which means that
1184 changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
1185 but this can be changed using "hash-type".
1186
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001187 <arguments> is an optional list of arguments which may be needed by some
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001188 algorithms. Right now, only "url_param" and "uri" support an
1189 optional argument.
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001190
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001191 balance uri [len <len>] [depth <depth>]
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001192 balance url_param <param> [check_post [<max_wait>]]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001193
Willy Tarreau3cd9af22009-03-15 14:06:41 +01001194 The load balancing algorithm of a backend is set to roundrobin when no other
1195 algorithm, mode nor option have been set. The algorithm may only be set once
1196 for each backend.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001197
1198 Examples :
1199 balance roundrobin
1200 balance url_param userid
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001201 balance url_param session_id check_post 64
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001202 balance hdr(User-Agent)
1203 balance hdr(host)
1204 balance hdr(Host) use_domain_only
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001205
1206 Note: the following caveats and limitations on using the "check_post"
1207 extension with "url_param" must be considered :
1208
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001209 - all POST requests are eligible for consideration, because there is no way
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001210 to determine if the parameters will be found in the body or entity which
1211 may contain binary data. Therefore another method may be required to
1212 restrict consideration of POST requests that have no URL parameters in
1213 the body. (see acl reqideny http_end)
1214
1215 - using a <max_wait> value larger than the request buffer size does not
1216 make sense and is useless. The buffer size is set at build time, and
1217 defaults to 16 kB.
1218
1219 - Content-Encoding is not supported, the parameter search will probably
1220 fail; and load balancing will fall back to Round Robin.
1221
1222 - Expect: 100-continue is not supported, load balancing will fall back to
1223 Round Robin.
1224
1225 - Transfer-Encoding (RFC2616 3.6.1) is only supported in the first chunk.
1226 If the entire parameter value is not present in the first chunk, the
1227 selection of server is undefined (actually, defined by how little
1228 actually appeared in the first chunk).
1229
1230 - This feature does not support generation of a 100, 411 or 501 response.
1231
1232 - In some cases, requesting "check_post" MAY attempt to scan the entire
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001233 contents of a message body. Scanning normally terminates when linear
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001234 white space or control characters are found, indicating the end of what
1235 might be a URL parameter list. This is probably not a concern with SGML
1236 type message bodies.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001237
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001238 See also : "dispatch", "cookie", "appsession", "transparent", "hash-type" and
1239 "http_proxy".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001240
1241
Willy Tarreauc5011ca2010-03-22 11:53:56 +01001242bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...]
1243bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] interface <interface>
1244bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] mss <maxseg>
1245bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] transparent
1246bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] id <id>
1247bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] name <name>
1248bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] defer-accept
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001249 Define one or several listening addresses and/or ports in a frontend.
1250 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1251 no | yes | yes | no
1252 Arguments :
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001253 <address> is optional and can be a host name, an IPv4 address, an IPv6
1254 address, or '*'. It designates the address the frontend will
1255 listen on. If unset, all IPv4 addresses of the system will be
1256 listened on. The same will apply for '*' or the system's
1257 special address "0.0.0.0".
1258
Willy Tarreauc5011ca2010-03-22 11:53:56 +01001259 <port_range> is either a unique TCP port, or a port range for which the
1260 proxy will accept connections for the IP address specified
1261 above. The port is mandatory. Note that in the case of an
1262 IPv6 address, the port is always the number after the last
1263 colon (':'). A range can either be :
1264 - a numerical port (ex: '80')
1265 - a dash-delimited ports range explicitly stating the lower
1266 and upper bounds (ex: '2000-2100') which are included in
1267 the range.
1268
1269 Particular care must be taken against port ranges, because
1270 every <address:port> couple consumes one socket (= a file
1271 descriptor), so it's easy to consume lots of descriptors
1272 with a simple range, and to run out of sockets. Also, each
1273 <address:port> couple must be used only once among all
1274 instances running on a same system. Please note that binding
1275 to ports lower than 1024 generally require particular
1276 privileges to start the program, which are independant of
1277 the 'uid' parameter.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001278
Willy Tarreau5e6e2042009-02-04 17:19:29 +01001279 <interface> is an optional physical interface name. This is currently
1280 only supported on Linux. The interface must be a physical
1281 interface, not an aliased interface. When specified, all
1282 addresses on the same line will only be accepted if the
1283 incoming packet physically come through the designated
1284 interface. It is also possible to bind multiple frontends to
1285 the same address if they are bound to different interfaces.
1286 Note that binding to a physical interface requires root
1287 privileges.
1288
Willy Tarreaube1b9182009-06-14 18:48:19 +02001289 <maxseg> is an optional TCP Maximum Segment Size (MSS) value to be
1290 advertised on incoming connections. This can be used to force
1291 a lower MSS for certain specific ports, for instance for
1292 connections passing through a VPN. Note that this relies on a
1293 kernel feature which is theorically supported under Linux but
1294 was buggy in all versions prior to 2.6.28. It may or may not
1295 work on other operating systems. The commonly advertised
1296 value on Ethernet networks is 1460 = 1500(MTU) - 40(IP+TCP).
1297
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02001298 <id> is a persistent value for socket ID. Must be positive and
1299 unique in the proxy. An unused value will automatically be
1300 assigned if unset. Can only be used when defining only a
1301 single socket.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02001302
1303 <name> is an optional name provided for stats
1304
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001305 transparent is an optional keyword which is supported only on certain
1306 Linux kernels. It indicates that the addresses will be bound
1307 even if they do not belong to the local machine. Any packet
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001308 targeting any of these addresses will be caught just as if
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001309 the address was locally configured. This normally requires
1310 that IP forwarding is enabled. Caution! do not use this with
1311 the default address '*', as it would redirect any traffic for
1312 the specified port. This keyword is available only when
1313 HAProxy is built with USE_LINUX_TPROXY=1.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001314
Willy Tarreaucb6cd432009-10-13 07:34:14 +02001315 defer_accept is an optional keyword which is supported only on certain
1316 Linux kernels. It states that a connection will only be
1317 accepted once some data arrive on it, or at worst after the
1318 first retransmit. This should be used only on protocols for
1319 which the client talks first (eg: HTTP). It can slightly
1320 improve performance by ensuring that most of the request is
1321 already available when the connection is accepted. On the
1322 other hand, it will not be able to detect connections which
1323 don't talk. It is important to note that this option is
1324 broken in all kernels up to 2.6.31, as the connection is
1325 never accepted until the client talks. This can cause issues
1326 with front firewalls which would see an established
1327 connection while the proxy will only see it in SYN_RECV.
1328
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001329 It is possible to specify a list of address:port combinations delimited by
1330 commas. The frontend will then listen on all of these addresses. There is no
1331 fixed limit to the number of addresses and ports which can be listened on in
1332 a frontend, as well as there is no limit to the number of "bind" statements
1333 in a frontend.
1334
1335 Example :
1336 listen http_proxy
1337 bind :80,:443
1338 bind 10.0.0.1:10080,10.0.0.1:10443
1339
1340 See also : "source".
1341
1342
Willy Tarreau0b9c02c2009-02-04 22:05:05 +01001343bind-process [ all | odd | even | <number 1-32> ] ...
1344 Limit visibility of an instance to a certain set of processes numbers.
1345 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1346 yes | yes | yes | yes
1347 Arguments :
1348 all All process will see this instance. This is the default. It
1349 may be used to override a default value.
1350
1351 odd This instance will be enabled on processes 1,3,5,...31. This
1352 option may be combined with other numbers.
1353
1354 even This instance will be enabled on processes 2,4,6,...32. This
1355 option may be combined with other numbers. Do not use it
1356 with less than 2 processes otherwise some instances might be
1357 missing from all processes.
1358
1359 number The instance will be enabled on this process number, between
1360 1 and 32. You must be careful not to reference a process
1361 number greater than the configured global.nbproc, otherwise
1362 some instances might be missing from all processes.
1363
1364 This keyword limits binding of certain instances to certain processes. This
1365 is useful in order not to have too many processes listening to the same
1366 ports. For instance, on a dual-core machine, it might make sense to set
1367 'nbproc 2' in the global section, then distributes the listeners among 'odd'
1368 and 'even' instances.
1369
1370 At the moment, it is not possible to reference more than 32 processes using
1371 this keyword, but this should be more than enough for most setups. Please
1372 note that 'all' really means all processes and is not limited to the first
1373 32.
1374
1375 If some backends are referenced by frontends bound to other processes, the
1376 backend automatically inherits the frontend's processes.
1377
1378 Example :
1379 listen app_ip1
1380 bind 10.0.0.1:80
1381 bind_process odd
1382
1383 listen app_ip2
1384 bind 10.0.0.2:80
1385 bind_process even
1386
1387 listen management
1388 bind 10.0.0.3:80
1389 bind_process 1 2 3 4
1390
1391 See also : "nbproc" in global section.
1392
1393
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001394block { if | unless } <condition>
1395 Block a layer 7 request if/unless a condition is matched
1396 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1397 no | yes | yes | yes
1398
1399 The HTTP request will be blocked very early in the layer 7 processing
1400 if/unless <condition> is matched. A 403 error will be returned if the request
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001401 is blocked. The condition has to reference ACLs (see section 7). This is
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001402 typically used to deny access to certain sensible resources if some
1403 conditions are met or not met. There is no fixed limit to the number of
1404 "block" statements per instance.
1405
1406 Example:
1407 acl invalid_src src 0.0.0.0/7 224.0.0.0/3
1408 acl invalid_src src_port 0:1023
1409 acl local_dst hdr(host) -i localhost
1410 block if invalid_src || local_dst
1411
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001412 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001413
1414
1415capture cookie <name> len <length>
1416 Capture and log a cookie in the request and in the response.
1417 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1418 no | yes | yes | no
1419 Arguments :
1420 <name> is the beginning of the name of the cookie to capture. In order
1421 to match the exact name, simply suffix the name with an equal
1422 sign ('='). The full name will appear in the logs, which is
1423 useful with application servers which adjust both the cookie name
1424 and value (eg: ASPSESSIONXXXXX).
1425
1426 <length> is the maximum number of characters to report in the logs, which
1427 include the cookie name, the equal sign and the value, all in the
1428 standard "name=value" form. The string will be truncated on the
1429 right if it exceeds <length>.
1430
1431 Only the first cookie is captured. Both the "cookie" request headers and the
1432 "set-cookie" response headers are monitored. This is particularly useful to
1433 check for application bugs causing session crossing or stealing between
1434 users, because generally the user's cookies can only change on a login page.
1435
1436 When the cookie was not presented by the client, the associated log column
1437 will report "-". When a request does not cause a cookie to be assigned by the
1438 server, a "-" is reported in the response column.
1439
1440 The capture is performed in the frontend only because it is necessary that
1441 the log format does not change for a given frontend depending on the
1442 backends. This may change in the future. Note that there can be only one
1443 "capture cookie" statement in a frontend. The maximum capture length is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001444 configured in the sources by default to 64 characters. It is not possible to
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001445 specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1446
1447 Example:
1448 capture cookie ASPSESSION len 32
1449
1450 See also : "capture request header", "capture response header" as well as
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001451 section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001452
1453
1454capture request header <name> len <length>
1455 Capture and log the first occurrence of the specified request header.
1456 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1457 no | yes | yes | no
1458 Arguments :
1459 <name> is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001460 case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001461 appear in the requests, with the first letter of each word in
1462 upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
1463 value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.
1464
1465 <length> is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
1466 report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
1467 it exceeds <length>.
1468
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001469 Only the first value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001470 value will be added to the logs between braces ('{}'). If multiple headers
1471 are captured, they will be delimited by a vertical bar ('|') and will appear
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001472 in the same order they were declared in the configuration. Non-existent
1473 headers will be logged just as an empty string. Common uses for request
1474 header captures include the "Host" field in virtual hosting environments, the
1475 "Content-length" when uploads are supported, "User-agent" to quickly
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001476 differentiate between real users and robots, and "X-Forwarded-For" in proxied
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001477 environments to find where the request came from.
1478
1479 Note that when capturing headers such as "User-agent", some spaces may be
1480 logged, making the log analysis more difficult. Thus be careful about what
1481 you log if you know your log parser is not smart enough to rely on the
1482 braces.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001483
1484 There is no limit to the number of captured request headers, but each capture
1485 is limited to 64 characters. In order to keep log format consistent for a
1486 same frontend, header captures can only be declared in a frontend. It is not
1487 possible to specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1488
1489 Example:
1490 capture request header Host len 15
1491 capture request header X-Forwarded-For len 15
1492 capture request header Referrer len 15
1493
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001494 See also : "capture cookie", "capture response header" as well as section 8
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001495 about logging.
1496
1497
1498capture response header <name> len <length>
1499 Capture and log the first occurrence of the specified response header.
1500 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1501 no | yes | yes | no
1502 Arguments :
1503 <name> is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001504 case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001505 appear in the response, with the first letter of each word in
1506 upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
1507 value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.
1508
1509 <length> is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
1510 report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
1511 it exceeds <length>.
1512
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001513 Only the first value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001514 result will be added to the logs between braces ('{}') after the captured
1515 request headers. If multiple headers are captured, they will be delimited by
1516 a vertical bar ('|') and will appear in the same order they were declared in
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001517 the configuration. Non-existent headers will be logged just as an empty
1518 string. Common uses for response header captures include the "Content-length"
1519 header which indicates how many bytes are expected to be returned, the
1520 "Location" header to track redirections.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001521
1522 There is no limit to the number of captured response headers, but each
1523 capture is limited to 64 characters. In order to keep log format consistent
1524 for a same frontend, header captures can only be declared in a frontend. It
1525 is not possible to specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1526
1527 Example:
1528 capture response header Content-length len 9
1529 capture response header Location len 15
1530
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001531 See also : "capture cookie", "capture request header" as well as section 8
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001532 about logging.
1533
1534
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01001535clitimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001536 Set the maximum inactivity time on the client side.
1537 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1538 yes | yes | yes | no
1539 Arguments :
1540 <timeout> is the timeout value is specified in milliseconds by default, but
1541 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
1542 as explained at the top of this document.
1543
1544 The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or
1545 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
1546 during the first phase, when the client sends the request, and during the
1547 response while it is reading data sent by the server. The value is specified
1548 in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
1549 suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP mode
1550 (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the
1551 client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in order to avoid complex
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001552 situations to debug. It is a good practice to cover one or several TCP packet
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001553 losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds
1554 (eg: 4 or 5 seconds).
1555
1556 This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in
1557 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
1558 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
1559 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
1560 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
1561 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
1562
1563 This parameter is provided for compatibility but is currently deprecated.
1564 Please use "timeout client" instead.
1565
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01001566 See also : "timeout client", "timeout http-request", "timeout server", and
1567 "srvtimeout".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001568
1569
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01001570contimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001571 Set the maximum time to wait for a connection attempt to a server to succeed.
1572 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1573 yes | no | yes | yes
1574 Arguments :
1575 <timeout> is the timeout value is specified in milliseconds by default, but
1576 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
1577 as explained at the top of this document.
1578
1579 If the server is located on the same LAN as haproxy, the connection should be
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001580 immediate (less than a few milliseconds). Anyway, it is a good practice to
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01001581 cover one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001582 slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds). By default, the
1583 connect timeout also presets the queue timeout to the same value if this one
1584 has not been specified. Historically, the contimeout was also used to set the
1585 tarpit timeout in a listen section, which is not possible in a pure frontend.
1586
1587 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
1588 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
1589 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
1590 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
1591 during startup because it may results in accumulation of failed sessions in
1592 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
1593
1594 This parameter is provided for backwards compatibility but is currently
1595 deprecated. Please use "timeout connect", "timeout queue" or "timeout tarpit"
1596 instead.
1597
1598 See also : "timeout connect", "timeout queue", "timeout tarpit",
1599 "timeout server", "contimeout".
1600
1601
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02001602cookie <name> [ rewrite | insert | prefix ] [ indirect ] [ nocache ]
Willy Tarreau68a897b2009-12-03 23:28:34 +01001603 [ postonly ] [ domain <domain> ]*
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001604 Enable cookie-based persistence in a backend.
1605 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1606 yes | no | yes | yes
1607 Arguments :
1608 <name> is the name of the cookie which will be monitored, modified or
1609 inserted in order to bring persistence. This cookie is sent to
1610 the client via a "Set-Cookie" header in the response, and is
1611 brought back by the client in a "Cookie" header in all requests.
1612 Special care should be taken to choose a name which does not
1613 conflict with any likely application cookie. Also, if the same
1614 backends are subject to be used by the same clients (eg:
1615 HTTP/HTTPS), care should be taken to use different cookie names
1616 between all backends if persistence between them is not desired.
1617
1618 rewrite This keyword indicates that the cookie will be provided by the
1619 server and that haproxy will have to modify its value to set the
1620 server's identifier in it. This mode is handy when the management
1621 of complex combinations of "Set-cookie" and "Cache-control"
1622 headers is left to the application. The application can then
1623 decide whether or not it is appropriate to emit a persistence
1624 cookie. Since all responses should be monitored, this mode only
1625 works in HTTP close mode. Unless the application behaviour is
1626 very complex and/or broken, it is advised not to start with this
1627 mode for new deployments. This keyword is incompatible with
1628 "insert" and "prefix".
1629
1630 insert This keyword indicates that the persistence cookie will have to
1631 be inserted by haproxy in the responses. If the server emits a
1632 cookie with the same name, it will be replaced anyway. For this
1633 reason, this mode can be used to upgrade existing configurations
1634 running in the "rewrite" mode. The cookie will only be a session
1635 cookie and will not be stored on the client's disk. Due to
1636 caching effects, it is generally wise to add the "indirect" and
1637 "nocache" or "postonly" keywords (see below). The "insert"
1638 keyword is not compatible with "rewrite" and "prefix".
1639
1640 prefix This keyword indicates that instead of relying on a dedicated
1641 cookie for the persistence, an existing one will be completed.
1642 This may be needed in some specific environments where the client
1643 does not support more than one single cookie and the application
1644 already needs it. In this case, whenever the server sets a cookie
1645 named <name>, it will be prefixed with the server's identifier
1646 and a delimiter. The prefix will be removed from all client
1647 requests so that the server still finds the cookie it emitted.
1648 Since all requests and responses are subject to being modified,
1649 this mode requires the HTTP close mode. The "prefix" keyword is
1650 not compatible with "rewrite" and "insert".
1651
1652 indirect When this option is specified in insert mode, cookies will only
1653 be added when the server was not reached after a direct access,
1654 which means that only when a server is elected after applying a
1655 load-balancing algorithm, or after a redispatch, then the cookie
1656 will be inserted. If the client has all the required information
1657 to connect to the same server next time, no further cookie will
1658 be inserted. In all cases, when the "indirect" option is used in
1659 insert mode, the cookie is always removed from the requests
1660 transmitted to the server. The persistence mechanism then becomes
1661 totally transparent from the application point of view.
1662
1663 nocache This option is recommended in conjunction with the insert mode
1664 when there is a cache between the client and HAProxy, as it
1665 ensures that a cacheable response will be tagged non-cacheable if
1666 a cookie needs to be inserted. This is important because if all
1667 persistence cookies are added on a cacheable home page for
1668 instance, then all customers will then fetch the page from an
1669 outer cache and will all share the same persistence cookie,
1670 leading to one server receiving much more traffic than others.
1671 See also the "insert" and "postonly" options.
1672
1673 postonly This option ensures that cookie insertion will only be performed
1674 on responses to POST requests. It is an alternative to the
1675 "nocache" option, because POST responses are not cacheable, so
1676 this ensures that the persistence cookie will never get cached.
1677 Since most sites do not need any sort of persistence before the
1678 first POST which generally is a login request, this is a very
1679 efficient method to optimize caching without risking to find a
1680 persistence cookie in the cache.
1681 See also the "insert" and "nocache" options.
1682
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiefe3b6f2008-05-23 23:49:32 +02001683 domain This option allows to specify the domain at which a cookie is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001684 inserted. It requires exactly one parameter: a valid domain
Willy Tarreau68a897b2009-12-03 23:28:34 +01001685 name. If the domain begins with a dot, the browser is allowed to
1686 use it for any host ending with that name. It is also possible to
1687 specify several domain names by invoking this option multiple
1688 times. Some browsers might have small limits on the number of
1689 domains, so be careful when doing that. For the record, sending
1690 10 domains to MSIE 6 or Firefox 2 works as expected.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiefe3b6f2008-05-23 23:49:32 +02001691
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001692 There can be only one persistence cookie per HTTP backend, and it can be
1693 declared in a defaults section. The value of the cookie will be the value
1694 indicated after the "cookie" keyword in a "server" statement. If no cookie
1695 is declared for a given server, the cookie is not set.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02001696
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001697 Examples :
1698 cookie JSESSIONID prefix
1699 cookie SRV insert indirect nocache
1700 cookie SRV insert postonly indirect
1701
1702 See also : "appsession", "balance source", "capture cookie", "server".
1703
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001704
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001705default-server [param*]
1706 Change default options for a server in a backend
1707 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1708 yes | no | yes | yes
1709 Arguments:
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001710 <param*> is a list of parameters for this server. The "default-server"
1711 keyword accepts an important number of options and has a complete
1712 section dedicated to it. Please refer to section 5 for more
1713 details.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001714
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001715 Example :
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001716 default-server inter 1000 weight 13
1717
1718 See also: "server" and section 5 about server options
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001719
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001720
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001721default_backend <backend>
1722 Specify the backend to use when no "use_backend" rule has been matched.
1723 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1724 yes | yes | yes | no
1725 Arguments :
1726 <backend> is the name of the backend to use.
1727
1728 When doing content-switching between frontend and backends using the
1729 "use_backend" keyword, it is often useful to indicate which backend will be
1730 used when no rule has matched. It generally is the dynamic backend which
1731 will catch all undetermined requests.
1732
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001733 Example :
1734
1735 use_backend dynamic if url_dyn
1736 use_backend static if url_css url_img extension_img
1737 default_backend dynamic
1738
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001739 See also : "use_backend", "reqsetbe", "reqisetbe"
1740
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001741
1742disabled
1743 Disable a proxy, frontend or backend.
1744 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1745 yes | yes | yes | yes
1746 Arguments : none
1747
1748 The "disabled" keyword is used to disable an instance, mainly in order to
1749 liberate a listening port or to temporarily disable a service. The instance
1750 will still be created and its configuration will be checked, but it will be
1751 created in the "stopped" state and will appear as such in the statistics. It
1752 will not receive any traffic nor will it send any health-checks or logs. It
1753 is possible to disable many instances at once by adding the "disabled"
1754 keyword in a "defaults" section.
1755
1756 See also : "enabled"
1757
1758
1759enabled
1760 Enable a proxy, frontend or backend.
1761 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1762 yes | yes | yes | yes
1763 Arguments : none
1764
1765 The "enabled" keyword is used to explicitly enable an instance, when the
1766 defaults has been set to "disabled". This is very rarely used.
1767
1768 See also : "disabled"
1769
1770
1771errorfile <code> <file>
1772 Return a file contents instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1773 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1774 yes | yes | yes | yes
1775 Arguments :
1776 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1777 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1778
1779 <file> designates a file containing the full HTTP response. It is
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001780 recommended to follow the common practice of appending ".http" to
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001781 the filename so that people do not confuse the response with HTML
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001782 error pages, and to use absolute paths, since files are read
1783 before any chroot is performed.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001784
1785 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1786 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1787 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1788
1789 The files are returned verbatim on the TCP socket. This allows any trick such
1790 as redirections to another URL or site, as well as tricks to clean cookies,
1791 force enable or disable caching, etc... The package provides default error
1792 files returning the same contents as default errors.
1793
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001794 The files should not exceed the configured buffer size (BUFSIZE), which
1795 generally is 8 or 16 kB, otherwise they will be truncated. It is also wise
1796 not to put any reference to local contents (eg: images) in order to avoid
1797 loops between the client and HAProxy when all servers are down, causing an
1798 error to be returned instead of an image. For better HTTP compliance, it is
1799 recommended that all header lines end with CR-LF and not LF alone.
1800
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001801 The files are read at the same time as the configuration and kept in memory.
1802 For this reason, the errors continue to be returned even when the process is
1803 chrooted, and no file change is considered while the process is running. A
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01001804 simple method for developing those files consists in associating them to the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001805 403 status code and interrogating a blocked URL.
1806
1807 See also : "errorloc", "errorloc302", "errorloc303"
1808
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001809 Example :
1810 errorfile 400 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/400badreq.http
1811 errorfile 403 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/403forbid.http
1812 errorfile 503 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/503sorry.http
1813
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001814
1815errorloc <code> <url>
1816errorloc302 <code> <url>
1817 Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1818 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1819 yes | yes | yes | yes
1820 Arguments :
1821 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1822 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1823
1824 <url> it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
1825 either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
1826 or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
1827 Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
1828 loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (eg: 500).
1829
1830 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1831 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1832 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1833
1834 Note that both keyword return the HTTP 302 status code, which tells the
1835 client to fetch the designated URL using the same HTTP method. This can be
1836 quite problematic in case of non-GET methods such as POST, because the URL
1837 sent to the client might not be allowed for something other than GET. To
1838 workaround this problem, please use "errorloc303" which send the HTTP 303
1839 status code, indicating to the client that the URL must be fetched with a GET
1840 request.
1841
1842 See also : "errorfile", "errorloc303"
1843
1844
1845errorloc303 <code> <url>
1846 Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1847 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1848 yes | yes | yes | yes
1849 Arguments :
1850 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1851 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1852
1853 <url> it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
1854 either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
1855 or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
1856 Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
1857 loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (eg: 500).
1858
1859 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1860 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1861 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1862
1863 Note that both keyword return the HTTP 303 status code, which tells the
1864 client to fetch the designated URL using the same HTTP GET method. This
1865 solves the usual problems associated with "errorloc" and the 302 code. It is
1866 possible that some very old browsers designed before HTTP/1.1 do not support
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001867 it, but no such problem has been reported till now.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001868
1869 See also : "errorfile", "errorloc", "errorloc302"
1870
1871
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01001872force-persist { if | unless } <condition>
1873 Declare a condition to force persistence on down servers
1874 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1875 no | yes | yes | yes
1876
1877 By default, requests are not dispatched to down servers. It is possible to
1878 force this using "option persist", but it is unconditional and redispatches
1879 to a valid server if "option redispatch" is set. That leaves with very little
1880 possibilities to force some requests to reach a server which is artificially
1881 marked down for maintenance operations.
1882
1883 The "force-persist" statement allows one to declare various ACL-based
1884 conditions which, when met, will cause a request to ignore the down status of
1885 a server and still try to connect to it. That makes it possible to start a
1886 server, still replying an error to the health checks, and run a specially
1887 configured browser to test the service. Among the handy methods, one could
1888 use a specific source IP address, or a specific cookie. The cookie also has
1889 the advantage that it can easily be added/removed on the browser from a test
1890 page. Once the service is validated, it is then possible to open the service
1891 to the world by returning a valid response to health checks.
1892
1893 The forced persistence is enabled when an "if" condition is met, or unless an
1894 "unless" condition is met. The final redispatch is always disabled when this
1895 is used.
1896
1897 See also : "option redispatch", "persist", and section 7 about ACL usage.
1898
1899
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001900fullconn <conns>
1901 Specify at what backend load the servers will reach their maxconn
1902 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1903 yes | no | yes | yes
1904 Arguments :
1905 <conns> is the number of connections on the backend which will make the
1906 servers use the maximal number of connections.
1907
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01001908 When a server has a "maxconn" parameter specified, it means that its number
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001909 of concurrent connections will never go higher. Additionally, if it has a
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01001910 "minconn" parameter, it indicates a dynamic limit following the backend's
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001911 load. The server will then always accept at least <minconn> connections,
1912 never more than <maxconn>, and the limit will be on the ramp between both
1913 values when the backend has less than <conns> concurrent connections. This
1914 makes it possible to limit the load on the servers during normal loads, but
1915 push it further for important loads without overloading the servers during
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001916 exceptional loads.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001917
1918 Example :
1919 # The servers will accept between 100 and 1000 concurrent connections each
1920 # and the maximum of 1000 will be reached when the backend reaches 10000
1921 # connections.
1922 backend dynamic
1923 fullconn 10000
1924 server srv1 dyn1:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
1925 server srv2 dyn2:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
1926
1927 See also : "maxconn", "server"
1928
1929
1930grace <time>
1931 Maintain a proxy operational for some time after a soft stop
1932 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Cyril Bonté99ed3272010-01-24 23:29:44 +01001933 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001934 Arguments :
1935 <time> is the time (by default in milliseconds) for which the instance
1936 will remain operational with the frontend sockets still listening
1937 when a soft-stop is received via the SIGUSR1 signal.
1938
1939 This may be used to ensure that the services disappear in a certain order.
1940 This was designed so that frontends which are dedicated to monitoring by an
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001941 external equipment fail immediately while other ones remain up for the time
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001942 needed by the equipment to detect the failure.
1943
1944 Note that currently, there is very little benefit in using this parameter,
1945 and it may in fact complicate the soft-reconfiguration process more than
1946 simplify it.
1947
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001948
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001949hash-type <method>
1950 Specify a method to use for mapping hashes to servers
1951 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1952 yes | no | yes | yes
1953 Arguments :
1954 map-based the hash table is a static array containing all alive servers.
1955 The hashes will be very smooth, will consider weights, but will
1956 be static in that weight changes while a server is up will be
1957 ignored. This means that there will be no slow start. Also,
1958 since a server is selected by its position in the array, most
1959 mappings are changed when the server count changes. This means
1960 that when a server goes up or down, or when a server is added
1961 to a farm, most connections will be redistributed to different
1962 servers. This can be inconvenient with caches for instance.
1963
1964 consistent the hash table is a tree filled with many occurrences of each
1965 server. The hash key is looked up in the tree and the closest
1966 server is chosen. This hash is dynamic, it supports changing
1967 weights while the servers are up, so it is compatible with the
1968 slow start feature. It has the advantage that when a server
1969 goes up or down, only its associations are moved. When a server
1970 is added to the farm, only a few part of the mappings are
1971 redistributed, making it an ideal algorithm for caches.
1972 However, due to its principle, the algorithm will never be very
1973 smooth and it may sometimes be necessary to adjust a server's
1974 weight or its ID to get a more balanced distribution. In order
1975 to get the same distribution on multiple load balancers, it is
1976 important that all servers have the same IDs.
1977
1978 The default hash type is "map-based" and is recommended for most usages.
1979
1980 See also : "balance", "server"
1981
1982
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001983http-check disable-on-404
1984 Enable a maintenance mode upon HTTP/404 response to health-checks
1985 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001986 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001987 Arguments : none
1988
1989 When this option is set, a server which returns an HTTP code 404 will be
1990 excluded from further load-balancing, but will still receive persistent
1991 connections. This provides a very convenient method for Web administrators
1992 to perform a graceful shutdown of their servers. It is also important to note
1993 that a server which is detected as failed while it was in this mode will not
1994 generate an alert, just a notice. If the server responds 2xx or 3xx again, it
1995 will immediately be reinserted into the farm. The status on the stats page
1996 reports "NOLB" for a server in this mode. It is important to note that this
1997 option only works in conjunction with the "httpchk" option.
1998
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001999 See also : "option httpchk"
2000
2001
Willy Tarreauef781042010-01-27 11:53:01 +01002002http-check send-state
2003 Enable emission of a state header with HTTP health checks
2004 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2005 yes | no | yes | yes
2006 Arguments : none
2007
2008 When this option is set, haproxy will systematically send a special header
2009 "X-Haproxy-Server-State" with a list of parameters indicating to each server
2010 how they are seen by haproxy. This can be used for instance when a server is
2011 manipulated without access to haproxy and the operator needs to know whether
2012 haproxy still sees it up or not, or if the server is the last one in a farm.
2013
2014 The header is composed of fields delimited by semi-colons, the first of which
2015 is a word ("UP", "DOWN", "NOLB"), possibly followed by a number of valid
2016 checks on the total number before transition, just as appears in the stats
2017 interface. Next headers are in the form "<variable>=<value>", indicating in
2018 no specific order some values available in the stats interface :
2019 - a variable "name", containing the name of the backend followed by a slash
2020 ("/") then the name of the server. This can be used when a server is
2021 checked in multiple backends.
2022
2023 - a variable "node" containing the name of the haproxy node, as set in the
2024 global "node" variable, otherwise the system's hostname if unspecified.
2025
2026 - a variable "weight" indicating the weight of the server, a slash ("/")
2027 and the total weight of the farm (just counting usable servers). This
2028 helps to know if other servers are available to handle the load when this
2029 one fails.
2030
2031 - a variable "scur" indicating the current number of concurrent connections
2032 on the server, followed by a slash ("/") then the total number of
2033 connections on all servers of the same backend.
2034
2035 - a variable "qcur" indicating the current number of requests in the
2036 server's queue.
2037
2038 Example of a header received by the application server :
2039 >>> X-Haproxy-Server-State: UP 2/3; name=bck/srv2; node=lb1; weight=1/2; \
2040 scur=13/22; qcur=0
2041
2042 See also : "option httpchk", "http-check disable-on-404"
2043
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01002044http-request { allow | deny | http-auth [realm <realm>] }
2045 [ { if | unless } <condition> ]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002046 Access control for Layer 7 requests
2047
2048 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2049 no | yes | yes | yes
2050
2051 These set of options allow to fine control access to a
2052 frontend/listen/backend. Each option may be followed by if/unless and acl.
2053 First option with matched condition (or option without condition) is final.
2054 For "block" a 403 error will be returned, for "allow" normal processing is
2055 performed, for "http-auth" a 401/407 error code is returned so the client
2056 should be asked to enter a username and password.
2057
2058 There is no fixed limit to the number of http-request statements per
2059 instance.
2060
2061 Example:
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01002062 acl nagios src 192.168.129.3
2063 acl local_net src 192.168.0.0/16
2064 acl auth_ok http_auth(L1)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002065
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01002066 http-request allow if nagios
2067 http-request allow if local_net auth_ok
2068 http-request auth realm Gimme if local_net auth_ok
2069 http-request deny
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002070
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01002071 Example:
2072 acl auth_ok http_auth_group(L1) G1
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002073
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01002074 http-request auth unless auth_ok
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002075
2076 See section 3.4 about userlists and 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreauef781042010-01-27 11:53:01 +01002077
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01002078id <value>
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02002079 Set a persistent ID to a proxy.
2080 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2081 no | yes | yes | yes
2082 Arguments : none
2083
2084 Set a persistent ID for the proxy. This ID must be unique and positive.
2085 An unused ID will automatically be assigned if unset. The first assigned
2086 value will be 1. This ID is currently only returned in statistics.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01002087
2088
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002089log global
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002090log <address> <facility> [<level> [<minlevel>]]
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002091 Enable per-instance logging of events and traffic.
2092 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2093 yes | yes | yes | yes
2094 Arguments :
2095 global should be used when the instance's logging parameters are the
2096 same as the global ones. This is the most common usage. "global"
2097 replaces <address>, <facility> and <level> with those of the log
2098 entries found in the "global" section. Only one "log global"
2099 statement may be used per instance, and this form takes no other
2100 parameter.
2101
2102 <address> indicates where to send the logs. It takes the same format as
2103 for the "global" section's logs, and can be one of :
2104
2105 - An IPv4 address optionally followed by a colon (':') and a UDP
2106 port. If no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the
2107 standard syslog port).
2108
2109 - A filesystem path to a UNIX domain socket, keeping in mind
2110 considerations for chroot (be sure the path is accessible
2111 inside the chroot) and uid/gid (be sure the path is
2112 appropriately writeable).
2113
2114 <facility> must be one of the 24 standard syslog facilities :
2115
2116 kern user mail daemon auth syslog lpr news
2117 uucp cron auth2 ftp ntp audit alert cron2
2118 local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7
2119
2120 <level> is optional and can be specified to filter outgoing messages. By
2121 default, all messages are sent. If a level is specified, only
2122 messages with a severity at least as important as this level
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002123 will be sent. An optional minimum level can be specified. If it
2124 is set, logs emitted with a more severe level than this one will
2125 be capped to this level. This is used to avoid sending "emerg"
2126 messages on all terminals on some default syslog configurations.
2127 Eight levels are known :
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002128
2129 emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug
2130
2131 Note that up to two "log" entries may be specified per instance. However, if
2132 "log global" is used and if the "global" section already contains 2 log
2133 entries, then additional log entries will be ignored.
2134
2135 Also, it is important to keep in mind that it is the frontend which decides
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01002136 what to log from a connection, and that in case of content switching, the log
2137 entries from the backend will be ignored. Connections are logged at level
2138 "info".
2139
2140 However, backend log declaration define how and where servers status changes
2141 will be logged. Level "notice" will be used to indicate a server going up,
2142 "warning" will be used for termination signals and definitive service
2143 termination, and "alert" will be used for when a server goes down.
2144
2145 Note : According to RFC3164, messages are truncated to 1024 bytes before
2146 being emitted.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002147
2148 Example :
2149 log global
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002150 log 127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice # only send important events
2151 log 127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice notice # same but limit output level
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002152
2153
2154maxconn <conns>
2155 Fix the maximum number of concurrent connections on a frontend
2156 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2157 yes | yes | yes | no
2158 Arguments :
2159 <conns> is the maximum number of concurrent connections the frontend will
2160 accept to serve. Excess connections will be queued by the system
2161 in the socket's listen queue and will be served once a connection
2162 closes.
2163
2164 If the system supports it, it can be useful on big sites to raise this limit
2165 very high so that haproxy manages connection queues, instead of leaving the
2166 clients with unanswered connection attempts. This value should not exceed the
2167 global maxconn. Also, keep in mind that a connection contains two buffers
2168 of 8kB each, as well as some other data resulting in about 17 kB of RAM being
2169 consumed per established connection. That means that a medium system equipped
2170 with 1GB of RAM can withstand around 40000-50000 concurrent connections if
2171 properly tuned.
2172
2173 Also, when <conns> is set to large values, it is possible that the servers
2174 are not sized to accept such loads, and for this reason it is generally wise
2175 to assign them some reasonable connection limits.
2176
2177 See also : "server", global section's "maxconn", "fullconn"
2178
2179
2180mode { tcp|http|health }
2181 Set the running mode or protocol of the instance
2182 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2183 yes | yes | yes | yes
2184 Arguments :
2185 tcp The instance will work in pure TCP mode. A full-duplex connection
2186 will be established between clients and servers, and no layer 7
2187 examination will be performed. This is the default mode. It
2188 should be used for SSL, SSH, SMTP, ...
2189
2190 http The instance will work in HTTP mode. The client request will be
2191 analyzed in depth before connecting to any server. Any request
2192 which is not RFC-compliant will be rejected. Layer 7 filtering,
2193 processing and switching will be possible. This is the mode which
2194 brings HAProxy most of its value.
2195
2196 health The instance will work in "health" mode. It will just reply "OK"
2197 to incoming connections and close the connection. Nothing will be
2198 logged. This mode is used to reply to external components health
2199 checks. This mode is deprecated and should not be used anymore as
2200 it is possible to do the same and even better by combining TCP or
2201 HTTP modes with the "monitor" keyword.
2202
2203 When doing content switching, it is mandatory that the frontend and the
2204 backend are in the same mode (generally HTTP), otherwise the configuration
2205 will be refused.
2206
2207 Example :
2208 defaults http_instances
2209 mode http
2210
2211 See also : "monitor", "monitor-net"
2212
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002213
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01002214monitor fail { if | unless } <condition>
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002215 Add a condition to report a failure to a monitor HTTP request.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002216 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2217 no | yes | yes | no
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002218 Arguments :
2219 if <cond> the monitor request will fail if the condition is satisfied,
2220 and will succeed otherwise. The condition should describe a
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002221 combined test which must induce a failure if all conditions
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002222 are met, for instance a low number of servers both in a
2223 backend and its backup.
2224
2225 unless <cond> the monitor request will succeed only if the condition is
2226 satisfied, and will fail otherwise. Such a condition may be
2227 based on a test on the presence of a minimum number of active
2228 servers in a list of backends.
2229
2230 This statement adds a condition which can force the response to a monitor
2231 request to report a failure. By default, when an external component queries
2232 the URI dedicated to monitoring, a 200 response is returned. When one of the
2233 conditions above is met, haproxy will return 503 instead of 200. This is
2234 very useful to report a site failure to an external component which may base
2235 routing advertisements between multiple sites on the availability reported by
2236 haproxy. In this case, one would rely on an ACL involving the "nbsrv"
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002237 criterion. Note that "monitor fail" only works in HTTP mode.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002238
2239 Example:
2240 frontend www
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002241 mode http
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002242 acl site_dead nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2
2243 acl site_dead nbsrv(static) lt 2
2244 monitor-uri /site_alive
2245 monitor fail if site_dead
2246
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002247 See also : "monitor-net", "monitor-uri"
2248
2249
2250monitor-net <source>
2251 Declare a source network which is limited to monitor requests
2252 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2253 yes | yes | yes | no
2254 Arguments :
2255 <source> is the source IPv4 address or network which will only be able to
2256 get monitor responses to any request. It can be either an IPv4
2257 address, a host name, or an address followed by a slash ('/')
2258 followed by a mask.
2259
2260 In TCP mode, any connection coming from a source matching <source> will cause
2261 the connection to be immediately closed without any log. This allows another
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002262 equipment to probe the port and verify that it is still listening, without
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002263 forwarding the connection to a remote server.
2264
2265 In HTTP mode, a connection coming from a source matching <source> will be
2266 accepted, the following response will be sent without waiting for a request,
2267 then the connection will be closed : "HTTP/1.0 200 OK". This is normally
2268 enough for any front-end HTTP probe to detect that the service is UP and
2269 running without forwarding the request to a backend server.
2270
2271 Monitor requests are processed very early. It is not possible to block nor
2272 divert them using ACLs. They cannot be logged either, and it is the intended
2273 purpose. They are only used to report HAProxy's health to an upper component,
2274 nothing more. Right now, it is not possible to set failure conditions on
2275 requests caught by "monitor-net".
2276
Willy Tarreau95cd2832010-03-04 23:36:33 +01002277 Last, please note that only one "monitor-net" statement can be specified in
2278 a frontend. If more than one is found, only the last one will be considered.
2279
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002280 Example :
2281 # addresses .252 and .253 are just probing us.
2282 frontend www
2283 monitor-net 192.168.0.252/31
2284
2285 See also : "monitor fail", "monitor-uri"
2286
2287
2288monitor-uri <uri>
2289 Intercept a URI used by external components' monitor requests
2290 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2291 yes | yes | yes | no
2292 Arguments :
2293 <uri> is the exact URI which we want to intercept to return HAProxy's
2294 health status instead of forwarding the request.
2295
2296 When an HTTP request referencing <uri> will be received on a frontend,
2297 HAProxy will not forward it nor log it, but instead will return either
2298 "HTTP/1.0 200 OK" or "HTTP/1.0 503 Service unavailable", depending on failure
2299 conditions defined with "monitor fail". This is normally enough for any
2300 front-end HTTP probe to detect that the service is UP and running without
2301 forwarding the request to a backend server. Note that the HTTP method, the
2302 version and all headers are ignored, but the request must at least be valid
2303 at the HTTP level. This keyword may only be used with an HTTP-mode frontend.
2304
2305 Monitor requests are processed very early. It is not possible to block nor
2306 divert them using ACLs. They cannot be logged either, and it is the intended
2307 purpose. They are only used to report HAProxy's health to an upper component,
2308 nothing more. However, it is possible to add any number of conditions using
2309 "monitor fail" and ACLs so that the result can be adjusted to whatever check
2310 can be imagined (most often the number of available servers in a backend).
2311
2312 Example :
2313 # Use /haproxy_test to report haproxy's status
2314 frontend www
2315 mode http
2316 monitor-uri /haproxy_test
2317
2318 See also : "monitor fail", "monitor-net"
2319
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002320
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002321option abortonclose
2322no option abortonclose
2323 Enable or disable early dropping of aborted requests pending in queues.
2324 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2325 yes | no | yes | yes
2326 Arguments : none
2327
2328 In presence of very high loads, the servers will take some time to respond.
2329 The per-instance connection queue will inflate, and the response time will
2330 increase respective to the size of the queue times the average per-session
2331 response time. When clients will wait for more than a few seconds, they will
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002332 often hit the "STOP" button on their browser, leaving a useless request in
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002333 the queue, and slowing down other users, and the servers as well, because the
2334 request will eventually be served, then aborted at the first error
2335 encountered while delivering the response.
2336
2337 As there is no way to distinguish between a full STOP and a simple output
2338 close on the client side, HTTP agents should be conservative and consider
2339 that the client might only have closed its output channel while waiting for
2340 the response. However, this introduces risks of congestion when lots of users
2341 do the same, and is completely useless nowadays because probably no client at
2342 all will close the session while waiting for the response. Some HTTP agents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002343 support this behaviour (Squid, Apache, HAProxy), and others do not (TUX, most
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002344 hardware-based load balancers). So the probability for a closed input channel
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002345 to represent a user hitting the "STOP" button is close to 100%, and the risk
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002346 of being the single component to break rare but valid traffic is extremely
2347 low, which adds to the temptation to be able to abort a session early while
2348 still not served and not pollute the servers.
2349
2350 In HAProxy, the user can choose the desired behaviour using the option
2351 "abortonclose". By default (without the option) the behaviour is HTTP
2352 compliant and aborted requests will be served. But when the option is
2353 specified, a session with an incoming channel closed will be aborted while
2354 it is still possible, either pending in the queue for a connection slot, or
2355 during the connection establishment if the server has not yet acknowledged
2356 the connection request. This considerably reduces the queue size and the load
2357 on saturated servers when users are tempted to click on STOP, which in turn
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002358 reduces the response time for other users.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002359
2360 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2361 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2362
2363 See also : "timeout queue" and server's "maxconn" and "maxqueue" parameters
2364
2365
Willy Tarreau4076a152009-04-02 15:18:36 +02002366option accept-invalid-http-request
2367no option accept-invalid-http-request
2368 Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP request parsing
2369 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2370 yes | yes | yes | no
2371 Arguments : none
2372
2373 By default, HAProxy complies with RFC2616 in terms of message parsing. This
2374 means that invalid characters in header names are not permitted and cause an
2375 error to be returned to the client. This is the desired behaviour as such
2376 forbidden characters are essentially used to build attacks exploiting server
2377 weaknesses, and bypass security filtering. Sometimes, a buggy browser or
2378 server will emit invalid header names for whatever reason (configuration,
2379 implementation) and the issue will not be immediately fixed. In such a case,
2380 it is possible to relax HAProxy's header name parser to accept any character
2381 even if that does not make sense, by specifying this option.
2382
2383 This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs
2384 and open security breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has
2385 been confirmed.
2386
2387 When this option is enabled, erroneous header names will still be accepted in
2388 requests, but the complete request will be captured in order to permit later
2389 analysis using the "show errors" request on the UNIX stats socket. Doing this
2390 also helps confirming that the issue has been solved.
2391
2392 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2393 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2394
2395 See also : "option accept-invalid-http-response" and "show errors" on the
2396 stats socket.
2397
2398
2399option accept-invalid-http-response
2400no option accept-invalid-http-response
2401 Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP response parsing
2402 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2403 yes | no | yes | yes
2404 Arguments : none
2405
2406 By default, HAProxy complies with RFC2616 in terms of message parsing. This
2407 means that invalid characters in header names are not permitted and cause an
2408 error to be returned to the client. This is the desired behaviour as such
2409 forbidden characters are essentially used to build attacks exploiting server
2410 weaknesses, and bypass security filtering. Sometimes, a buggy browser or
2411 server will emit invalid header names for whatever reason (configuration,
2412 implementation) and the issue will not be immediately fixed. In such a case,
2413 it is possible to relax HAProxy's header name parser to accept any character
2414 even if that does not make sense, by specifying this option.
2415
2416 This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs
2417 and open security breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has
2418 been confirmed.
2419
2420 When this option is enabled, erroneous header names will still be accepted in
2421 responses, but the complete response will be captured in order to permit
2422 later analysis using the "show errors" request on the UNIX stats socket.
2423 Doing this also helps confirming that the issue has been solved.
2424
2425 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2426 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2427
2428 See also : "option accept-invalid-http-request" and "show errors" on the
2429 stats socket.
2430
2431
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002432option allbackups
2433no option allbackups
2434 Use either all backup servers at a time or only the first one
2435 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2436 yes | no | yes | yes
2437 Arguments : none
2438
2439 By default, the first operational backup server gets all traffic when normal
2440 servers are all down. Sometimes, it may be preferred to use multiple backups
2441 at once, because one will not be enough. When "option allbackups" is enabled,
2442 the load balancing will be performed among all backup servers when all normal
2443 ones are unavailable. The same load balancing algorithm will be used and the
2444 servers' weights will be respected. Thus, there will not be any priority
2445 order between the backup servers anymore.
2446
2447 This option is mostly used with static server farms dedicated to return a
2448 "sorry" page when an application is completely offline.
2449
2450 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2451 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2452
2453
2454option checkcache
2455no option checkcache
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002456 Analyze all server responses and block requests with cacheable cookies
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002457 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2458 yes | no | yes | yes
2459 Arguments : none
2460
2461 Some high-level frameworks set application cookies everywhere and do not
2462 always let enough control to the developer to manage how the responses should
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002463 be cached. When a session cookie is returned on a cacheable object, there is a
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002464 high risk of session crossing or stealing between users traversing the same
2465 caches. In some situations, it is better to block the response than to let
2466 some sensible session information go in the wild.
2467
2468 The option "checkcache" enables deep inspection of all server responses for
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002469 strict compliance with HTTP specification in terms of cacheability. It
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002470 carefully checks "Cache-control", "Pragma" and "Set-cookie" headers in server
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002471 response to check if there's a risk of caching a cookie on a client-side
2472 proxy. When this option is enabled, the only responses which can be delivered
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002473 to the client are :
2474 - all those without "Set-Cookie" header ;
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002475 - all those with a return code other than 200, 203, 206, 300, 301, 410,
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002476 provided that the server has not set a "Cache-control: public" header ;
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002477 - all those that come from a POST request, provided that the server has not
2478 set a 'Cache-Control: public' header ;
2479 - those with a 'Pragma: no-cache' header
2480 - those with a 'Cache-control: private' header
2481 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-store' header
2482 - those with a 'Cache-control: max-age=0' header
2483 - those with a 'Cache-control: s-maxage=0' header
2484 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache' header
2485 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache="set-cookie"' header
2486 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache="set-cookie,' header
2487 (allowing other fields after set-cookie)
2488
2489 If a response doesn't respect these requirements, then it will be blocked
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002490 just as if it was from an "rspdeny" filter, with an "HTTP 502 bad gateway".
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002491 The session state shows "PH--" meaning that the proxy blocked the response
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002492 during headers processing. Additionally, an alert will be sent in the logs so
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002493 that admins are informed that there's something to be fixed.
2494
2495 Due to the high impact on the application, the application should be tested
2496 in depth with the option enabled before going to production. It is also a
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01002497 good practice to always activate it during tests, even if it is not used in
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002498 production, as it will report potentially dangerous application behaviours.
2499
2500 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2501 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2502
2503
2504option clitcpka
2505no option clitcpka
2506 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the client side
2507 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2508 yes | yes | yes | no
2509 Arguments : none
2510
2511 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
2512 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
2513 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
2514 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
2515
2516 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
2517 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
2518 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
2519 operating system and its tuning parameters.
2520
2521 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
2522 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
2523 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
2524 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
2525 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
2526
2527 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
2528
2529 Using option "clitcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the
2530 client side of a connection, which should help when session expirations are
2531 noticed between HAProxy and a client.
2532
2533 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2534 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2535
2536 See also : "option srvtcpka", "option tcpka"
2537
2538
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002539option contstats
2540 Enable continuous traffic statistics updates
2541 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2542 yes | yes | yes | no
2543 Arguments : none
2544
2545 By default, counters used for statistics calculation are incremented
2546 only when a session finishes. It works quite well when serving small
2547 objects, but with big ones (for example large images or archives) or
2548 with A/V streaming, a graph generated from haproxy counters looks like
2549 a hedgehog. With this option enabled counters get incremented continuously,
2550 during a whole session. Recounting touches a hotpath directly so
2551 it is not enabled by default, as it has small performance impact (~0.5%).
2552
2553
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002554option dontlog-normal
2555no option dontlog-normal
2556 Enable or disable logging of normal, successful connections
2557 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2558 yes | yes | yes | no
2559 Arguments : none
2560
2561 There are large sites dealing with several thousand connections per second
2562 and for which logging is a major pain. Some of them are even forced to turn
2563 logs off and cannot debug production issues. Setting this option ensures that
2564 normal connections, those which experience no error, no timeout, no retry nor
2565 redispatch, will not be logged. This leaves disk space for anomalies. In HTTP
2566 mode, the response status code is checked and return codes 5xx will still be
2567 logged.
2568
2569 It is strongly discouraged to use this option as most of the time, the key to
2570 complex issues is in the normal logs which will not be logged here. If you
2571 need to separate logs, see the "log-separate-errors" option instead.
2572
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002573 See also : "log", "dontlognull", "log-separate-errors" and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002574 logging.
2575
2576
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002577option dontlognull
2578no option dontlognull
2579 Enable or disable logging of null connections
2580 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2581 yes | yes | yes | no
2582 Arguments : none
2583
2584 In certain environments, there are components which will regularly connect to
2585 various systems to ensure that they are still alive. It can be the case from
2586 another load balancer as well as from monitoring systems. By default, even a
2587 simple port probe or scan will produce a log. If those connections pollute
2588 the logs too much, it is possible to enable option "dontlognull" to indicate
2589 that a connection on which no data has been transferred will not be logged,
2590 which typically corresponds to those probes.
2591
2592 It is generally recommended not to use this option in uncontrolled
2593 environments (eg: internet), otherwise scans and other malicious activities
2594 would not be logged.
2595
2596 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2597 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2598
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002599 See also : "log", "monitor-net", "monitor-uri" and section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002600
2601
2602option forceclose
2603no option forceclose
2604 Enable or disable active connection closing after response is transferred.
2605 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaua31e5df2009-12-30 01:10:35 +01002606 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002607 Arguments : none
2608
2609 Some HTTP servers do not necessarily close the connections when they receive
2610 the "Connection: close" set by "option httpclose", and if the client does not
2611 close either, then the connection remains open till the timeout expires. This
2612 causes high number of simultaneous connections on the servers and shows high
2613 global session times in the logs.
2614
2615 When this happens, it is possible to use "option forceclose". It will
Willy Tarreau82eeaf22009-12-29 12:09:05 +01002616 actively close the outgoing server channel as soon as the server has finished
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002617 to respond. This option implicitly enables the "httpclose" option. Note that
2618 this option also enables the parsing of the full request and response, which
2619 means we can close the connection to the server very quickly, releasing some
2620 resources earlier than with httpclose.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002621
2622 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2623 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2624
2625 See also : "option httpclose"
2626
2627
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002628option forwardfor [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ]
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002629 Enable insertion of the X-Forwarded-For header to requests sent to servers
2630 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2631 yes | yes | yes | yes
2632 Arguments :
2633 <network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
2634 matching <network>
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002635 <name> an optional argument to specify a different "X-Forwarded-For"
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002636 header name.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002637
2638 Since HAProxy works in reverse-proxy mode, the servers see its IP address as
2639 their client address. This is sometimes annoying when the client's IP address
2640 is expected in server logs. To solve this problem, the well-known HTTP header
2641 "X-Forwarded-For" may be added by HAProxy to all requests sent to the server.
2642 This header contains a value representing the client's IP address. Since this
2643 header is always appended at the end of the existing header list, the server
2644 must be configured to always use the last occurrence of this header only. See
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002645 the server's manual to find how to enable use of this standard header. Note
2646 that only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is really
2647 possible that the client has already brought one.
2648
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002649 The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002650 the default "X-Forwarded-For". This can be useful where you might already
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002651 have a "X-Forwarded-For" header from a different application (eg: stunnel),
2652 and you need preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't use the
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002653 "X-Forwarded-For" header and requires different one (eg: Zeus Web Servers
2654 require "X-Cluster-Client-IP").
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002655
2656 Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client
2657 access and a reverse-proxy access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is
2658 used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to disable the addition of the
2659 header for a known source address or network by adding the "except" keyword
2660 followed by the network address. In this case, any source IP matching the
2661 network will not cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with
2662 private networks or 127.0.0.1.
2663
2664 This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002665 least one of them uses it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's
2666 setting of the header subargument takes precedence over the frontend's if
2667 both are defined.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002668
2669 It is important to note that as long as HAProxy does not support keep-alive
2670 connections, only the first request of a connection will receive the header.
2671 For this reason, it is important to ensure that "option httpclose" is set
2672 when using this option.
2673
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002674 Examples :
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002675 # Public HTTP address also used by stunnel on the same machine
2676 frontend www
2677 mode http
2678 option forwardfor except 127.0.0.1 # stunnel already adds the header
2679
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002680 # Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client
2681 backend www
2682 mode http
2683 option forwardfor header X-Client
2684
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002685 See also : "option httpclose"
2686
2687
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002688option http-server-close
2689no option http-server-close
2690 Enable or disable HTTP connection closing on the server side
2691 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2692 yes | yes | yes | yes
2693 Arguments : none
2694
2695 This mode enables HTTP connection-close mode on the server side while keeping
2696 the ability to support HTTP keep-alive and pipelining on the client side.
2697 This provides the lowest latency on the client side (slow network) and the
2698 fastest session reuse on the server side to save server resources, similarly
2699 to "option forceclose". It also permits non-keepalive capable servers to be
2700 served in keep-alive mode to the clients if they conform to the requirements
2701 of RFC2616.
2702
2703 At the moment, logs will not indicate whether requests came from the same
2704 session or not. The accept date reported in the logs corresponds to the end
2705 of the previous request, and the request time corresponds to the time spent
2706 waiting for a new request. The keep-alive request time is still bound to the
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01002707 timeout defined by "timeout http-keep-alive" or "timeout http-request" if
2708 not set.
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002709
2710 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2711 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002712 It is worth noting that "option forceclose" has precedence over "option
2713 http-server-close" and that combining "http-server-close" with "httpclose"
2714 basically achieve the same result as "forceclose".
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002715
2716 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2717 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2718
2719 See also : "option forceclose" and "option httpclose"
2720
2721
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002722option http-use-proxy-header
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01002723no option http-use-proxy-header
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002724 Make use of non-standard Proxy-Connection header instead of Connection
2725 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2726 yes | yes | yes | no
2727 Arguments : none
2728
2729 While RFC2616 explicitly states that HTTP/1.1 agents must use the
2730 Connection header to indicate their wish of persistent or non-persistent
2731 connections, both browsers and proxies ignore this header for proxied
2732 connections and make use of the undocumented, non-standard Proxy-Connection
2733 header instead. The issue begins when trying to put a load balancer between
2734 browsers and such proxies, because there will be a difference between what
2735 haproxy understands and what the client and the proxy agree on.
2736
2737 By setting this option in a frontend, haproxy can automatically switch to use
2738 that non-standard header if it sees proxied requests. A proxied request is
2739 defined here as one where the URI begins with neither a '/' nor a '*'. The
2740 choice of header only affects requests passing through proxies making use of
2741 one of the "httpclose", "forceclose" and "http-server-close" options. Note
2742 that this option can only be specified in a frontend and will affect the
2743 request along its whole life.
2744
Willy Tarreau844a7e72010-01-31 21:46:18 +01002745 Also, when this option is set, a request which requires authentication will
2746 automatically switch to use proxy authentication headers if it is itself a
2747 proxied request. That makes it possible to check or enforce authentication in
2748 front of an existing proxy.
2749
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002750 This option should normally never be used, except in front of a proxy.
2751
2752 See also : "option httpclose", "option forceclose" and "option
2753 http-server-close".
2754
2755
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01002756option httpchk
2757option httpchk <uri>
2758option httpchk <method> <uri>
2759option httpchk <method> <uri> <version>
2760 Enable HTTP protocol to check on the servers health
2761 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2762 yes | no | yes | yes
2763 Arguments :
2764 <method> is the optional HTTP method used with the requests. When not set,
2765 the "OPTIONS" method is used, as it generally requires low server
2766 processing and is easy to filter out from the logs. Any method
2767 may be used, though it is not recommended to invent non-standard
2768 ones.
2769
2770 <uri> is the URI referenced in the HTTP requests. It defaults to " / "
2771 which is accessible by default on almost any server, but may be
2772 changed to any other URI. Query strings are permitted.
2773
2774 <version> is the optional HTTP version string. It defaults to "HTTP/1.0"
2775 but some servers might behave incorrectly in HTTP 1.0, so turning
2776 it to HTTP/1.1 may sometimes help. Note that the Host field is
2777 mandatory in HTTP/1.1, and as a trick, it is possible to pass it
2778 after "\r\n" following the version string.
2779
2780 By default, server health checks only consist in trying to establish a TCP
2781 connection. When "option httpchk" is specified, a complete HTTP request is
2782 sent once the TCP connection is established, and responses 2xx and 3xx are
2783 considered valid, while all other ones indicate a server failure, including
2784 the lack of any response.
2785
2786 The port and interval are specified in the server configuration.
2787
2788 This option does not necessarily require an HTTP backend, it also works with
2789 plain TCP backends. This is particularly useful to check simple scripts bound
2790 to some dedicated ports using the inetd daemon.
2791
2792 Examples :
2793 # Relay HTTPS traffic to Apache instance and check service availability
2794 # using HTTP request "OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1" on port 80.
2795 backend https_relay
2796 mode tcp
2797 option httpchk OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1\r\nHost:\ www
2798 server apache1 192.168.1.1:443 check port 80
2799
2800 See also : "option ssl-hello-chk", "option smtpchk", "option mysql-check",
2801 "http-check" and the "check", "port" and "inter" server options.
2802
2803
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002804option httpclose
2805no option httpclose
2806 Enable or disable passive HTTP connection closing
2807 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2808 yes | yes | yes | yes
2809 Arguments : none
2810
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002811 As stated in section 1, HAProxy does not yes support the HTTP keep-alive
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002812 mode. So by default, if a client communicates with a server in this mode, it
2813 will only analyze, log, and process the first request of each connection. To
2814 workaround this limitation, it is possible to specify "option httpclose". It
2815 will check if a "Connection: close" header is already set in each direction,
2816 and will add one if missing. Each end should react to this by actively
2817 closing the TCP connection after each transfer, thus resulting in a switch to
2818 the HTTP close mode. Any "Connection" header different from "close" will also
2819 be removed.
2820
2821 It seldom happens that some servers incorrectly ignore this header and do not
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002822 close the connection eventhough they reply "Connection: close". For this
2823 reason, they are not compatible with older HTTP 1.0 browsers. If this happens
2824 it is possible to use the "option forceclose" which actively closes the
2825 request connection once the server responds. Option "forceclose" also
2826 releases the server connection earlier because it does not have to wait for
2827 the client to acknowledge it.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002828
2829 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2830 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
2831 If "option forceclose" is specified too, it has precedence over "httpclose".
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002832 If "option http-server-close" is enabled at the same time as "httpclose", it
2833 basically achieves the same result as "option forceclose".
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002834
2835 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2836 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2837
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002838 See also : "option forceclose" and "option http-server-close"
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002839
2840
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002841option httplog [ clf ]
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002842 Enable logging of HTTP request, session state and timers
2843 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2844 yes | yes | yes | yes
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002845 Arguments :
2846 clf if the "clf" argument is added, then the output format will be
2847 the CLF format instead of HAProxy's default HTTP format. You can
2848 use this when you need to feed HAProxy's logs through a specific
2849 log analyser which only support the CLF format and which is not
2850 extensible.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002851
2852 By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the
2853 source and destination addresses, and the instance name. By specifying
2854 "option httplog", each log line turns into a much richer format including,
2855 but not limited to, the HTTP request, the connection timers, the session
2856 status, the connections numbers, the captured headers and cookies, the
2857 frontend, backend and server name, and of course the source address and
2858 ports.
2859
2860 This option may be set either in the frontend or the backend.
2861
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002862 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2863 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it. Specifying
2864 only "option httplog" will automatically clear the 'clf' mode if it was set
2865 by default.
2866
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002867 See also : section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002868
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02002869
2870option http_proxy
2871no option http_proxy
2872 Enable or disable plain HTTP proxy mode
2873 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2874 yes | yes | yes | yes
2875 Arguments : none
2876
2877 It sometimes happens that people need a pure HTTP proxy which understands
2878 basic proxy requests without caching nor any fancy feature. In this case,
2879 it may be worth setting up an HAProxy instance with the "option http_proxy"
2880 set. In this mode, no server is declared, and the connection is forwarded to
2881 the IP address and port found in the URL after the "http://" scheme.
2882
2883 No host address resolution is performed, so this only works when pure IP
2884 addresses are passed. Since this option's usage perimeter is rather limited,
2885 it will probably be used only by experts who know they need exactly it. Last,
2886 if the clients are susceptible of sending keep-alive requests, it will be
2887 needed to add "option http_close" to ensure that all requests will correctly
2888 be analyzed.
2889
2890 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2891 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2892
2893 Example :
2894 # this backend understands HTTP proxy requests and forwards them directly.
2895 backend direct_forward
2896 option httpclose
2897 option http_proxy
2898
2899 See also : "option httpclose"
2900
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +02002901
Willy Tarreauf27b5ea2009-10-03 22:01:18 +02002902option independant-streams
2903no option independant-streams
2904 Enable or disable independant timeout processing for both directions
2905 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2906 yes | yes | yes | yes
2907 Arguments : none
2908
2909 By default, when data is sent over a socket, both the write timeout and the
2910 read timeout for that socket are refreshed, because we consider that there is
2911 activity on that socket, and we have no other means of guessing if we should
2912 receive data or not.
2913
2914 While this default behaviour is desirable for almost all applications, there
2915 exists a situation where it is desirable to disable it, and only refresh the
2916 read timeout if there are incoming data. This happens on sessions with large
2917 timeouts and low amounts of exchanged data such as telnet session. If the
2918 server suddenly disappears, the output data accumulates in the system's
2919 socket buffers, both timeouts are correctly refreshed, and there is no way
2920 to know the server does not receive them, so we don't timeout. However, when
2921 the underlying protocol always echoes sent data, it would be enough by itself
2922 to detect the issue using the read timeout. Note that this problem does not
2923 happen with more verbose protocols because data won't accumulate long in the
2924 socket buffers.
2925
2926 When this option is set on the frontend, it will disable read timeout updates
2927 on data sent to the client. There probably is little use of this case. When
2928 the option is set on the backend, it will disable read timeout updates on
2929 data sent to the server. Doing so will typically break large HTTP posts from
2930 slow lines, so use it with caution.
2931
2932 See also : "timeout client" and "timeout server"
2933
2934
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +02002935option log-health-checks
2936no option log-health-checks
2937 Enable or disable logging of health checks
2938 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2939 yes | no | yes | yes
2940 Arguments : none
2941
2942 Enable health checks logging so it possible to check for example what
2943 was happening before a server crash. Failed health check are logged if
2944 server is UP and succeeded health checks if server is DOWN, so the amount
2945 of additional information is limited.
2946
2947 If health check logging is enabled no health check status is printed
2948 when servers is set up UP/DOWN/ENABLED/DISABLED.
2949
2950 See also: "log" and section 8 about logging.
2951
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002952
2953option log-separate-errors
2954no option log-separate-errors
2955 Change log level for non-completely successful connections
2956 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2957 yes | yes | yes | no
2958 Arguments : none
2959
2960 Sometimes looking for errors in logs is not easy. This option makes haproxy
2961 raise the level of logs containing potentially interesting information such
2962 as errors, timeouts, retries, redispatches, or HTTP status codes 5xx. The
2963 level changes from "info" to "err". This makes it possible to log them
2964 separately to a different file with most syslog daemons. Be careful not to
2965 remove them from the original file, otherwise you would lose ordering which
2966 provides very important information.
2967
2968 Using this option, large sites dealing with several thousand connections per
2969 second may log normal traffic to a rotating buffer and only archive smaller
2970 error logs.
2971
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002972 See also : "log", "dontlognull", "dontlog-normal" and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002973 logging.
2974
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002975
2976option logasap
2977no option logasap
2978 Enable or disable early logging of HTTP requests
2979 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2980 yes | yes | yes | no
2981 Arguments : none
2982
2983 By default, HTTP requests are logged upon termination so that the total
2984 transfer time and the number of bytes appear in the logs. When large objects
2985 are being transferred, it may take a while before the request appears in the
2986 logs. Using "option logasap", the request gets logged as soon as the server
2987 sends the complete headers. The only missing information in the logs will be
2988 the total number of bytes which will indicate everything except the amount
2989 of data transferred, and the total time which will not take the transfer
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01002990 time into account. In such a situation, it's a good practice to capture the
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002991 "Content-Length" response header so that the logs at least indicate how many
2992 bytes are expected to be transferred.
2993
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01002994 Examples :
2995 listen http_proxy 0.0.0.0:80
2996 mode http
2997 option httplog
2998 option logasap
2999 log 192.168.2.200 local3
3000
3001 >>> Feb 6 12:14:14 localhost \
3002 haproxy[14389]: 10.0.1.2:33317 [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655] http-in \
3003 static/srv1 9/10/7/14/+30 200 +243 - - ---- 3/1/1/1/0 1/0 \
3004 "GET /image.iso HTTP/1.0"
3005
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003006 See also : "option httplog", "capture response header", and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01003007 logging.
3008
3009
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +01003010option mysql-check
3011 Use Mysql health checks for server testing
3012 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3013 yes | no | yes | yes
3014 Arguments : none
3015
3016 The check consists in parsing Mysql Handshake Initialisation packet or Error
3017 packet, which is sent by MySQL server on connect. It is a basic but useful
3018 test which does not produce any logging on the server. However, it does not
3019 check database presence nor database consistency, nor user permission to
3020 access. To do this, you can use an external check with xinetd for example.
3021
3022 Most often, an incoming MySQL server needs to see the client's IP address for
3023 various purposes, including IP privilege matching and connection logging.
3024 When possible, it is often wise to masquerade the client's IP address when
3025 connecting to the server using the "usesrc" argument of the "source" keyword,
3026 which requires the cttproxy feature to be compiled in, and the MySQL server
3027 to route the client via the machine hosting haproxy.
3028
3029 See also: "option httpchk"
3030
3031
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003032option nolinger
3033no option nolinger
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003034 Enable or disable immediate session resource cleaning after close
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003035 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3036 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003037 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003038
3039 When clients or servers abort connections in a dirty way (eg: they are
3040 physically disconnected), the session timeouts triggers and the session is
3041 closed. But it will remain in FIN_WAIT1 state for some time in the system,
3042 using some resources and possibly limiting the ability to establish newer
3043 connections.
3044
3045 When this happens, it is possible to activate "option nolinger" which forces
3046 the system to immediately remove any socket's pending data on close. Thus,
3047 the session is instantly purged from the system's tables. This usually has
3048 side effects such as increased number of TCP resets due to old retransmits
3049 getting immediately rejected. Some firewalls may sometimes complain about
3050 this too.
3051
3052 For this reason, it is not recommended to use this option when not absolutely
3053 needed. You know that you need it when you have thousands of FIN_WAIT1
3054 sessions on your system (TIME_WAIT ones do not count).
3055
3056 This option may be used both on frontends and backends, depending on the side
3057 where it is required. Use it on the frontend for clients, and on the backend
3058 for servers.
3059
3060 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3061 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3062
3063
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02003064option originalto [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ]
3065 Enable insertion of the X-Original-To header to requests sent to servers
3066 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3067 yes | yes | yes | yes
3068 Arguments :
3069 <network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
3070 matching <network>
3071 <name> an optional argument to specify a different "X-Original-To"
3072 header name.
3073
3074 Since HAProxy can work in transparent mode, every request from a client can
3075 be redirected to the proxy and HAProxy itself can proxy every request to a
3076 complex SQUID environment and the destination host from SO_ORIGINAL_DST will
3077 be lost. This is annoying when you want access rules based on destination ip
3078 addresses. To solve this problem, a new HTTP header "X-Original-To" may be
3079 added by HAProxy to all requests sent to the server. This header contains a
3080 value representing the original destination IP address. Since this must be
3081 configured to always use the last occurrence of this header only. Note that
3082 only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is really
3083 possible that the client has already brought one.
3084
3085 The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace
3086 the default "X-Original-To". This can be useful where you might already
3087 have a "X-Original-To" header from a different application, and you need
3088 preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't use the "X-Original-To"
3089 header and requires different one.
3090
3091 Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client
3092 access and a reverse-proxy access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is
3093 used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to disable the addition of the
3094 header for a known source address or network by adding the "except" keyword
3095 followed by the network address. In this case, any source IP matching the
3096 network will not cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with
3097 private networks or 127.0.0.1.
3098
3099 This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at
3100 least one of them uses it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's
3101 setting of the header subargument takes precedence over the frontend's if
3102 both are defined.
3103
3104 It is important to note that as long as HAProxy does not support keep-alive
3105 connections, only the first request of a connection will receive the header.
3106 For this reason, it is important to ensure that "option httpclose" is set
3107 when using this option.
3108
3109 Examples :
3110 # Original Destination address
3111 frontend www
3112 mode http
3113 option originalto except 127.0.0.1
3114
3115 # Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client-Dst
3116 backend www
3117 mode http
3118 option originalto header X-Client-Dst
3119
3120 See also : "option httpclose"
3121
3122
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003123option persist
3124no option persist
3125 Enable or disable forced persistence on down servers
3126 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3127 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003128 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003129
3130 When an HTTP request reaches a backend with a cookie which references a dead
3131 server, by default it is redispatched to another server. It is possible to
3132 force the request to be sent to the dead server first using "option persist"
3133 if absolutely needed. A common use case is when servers are under extreme
3134 load and spend their time flapping. In this case, the users would still be
3135 directed to the server they opened the session on, in the hope they would be
3136 correctly served. It is recommended to use "option redispatch" in conjunction
3137 with this option so that in the event it would not be possible to connect to
3138 the server at all (server definitely dead), the client would finally be
3139 redirected to another valid server.
3140
3141 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3142 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3143
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01003144 See also : "option redispatch", "retries", "force-persist"
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003145
3146
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003147option redispatch
3148no option redispatch
3149 Enable or disable session redistribution in case of connection failure
3150 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3151 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003152 Arguments : none
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003153
3154 In HTTP mode, if a server designated by a cookie is down, clients may
3155 definitely stick to it because they cannot flush the cookie, so they will not
3156 be able to access the service anymore.
3157
3158 Specifying "option redispatch" will allow the proxy to break their
3159 persistence and redistribute them to a working server.
3160
3161 It also allows to retry last connection to another server in case of multiple
3162 connection failures. Of course, it requires having "retries" set to a nonzero
3163 value.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003164
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003165 This form is the preferred form, which replaces both the "redispatch" and
3166 "redisp" keywords.
3167
3168 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3169 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3170
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01003171 See also : "redispatch", "retries", "force-persist"
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003172
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003173
3174option smtpchk
3175option smtpchk <hello> <domain>
3176 Use SMTP health checks for server testing
3177 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3178 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003179 Arguments :
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003180 <hello> is an optional argument. It is the "hello" command to use. It can
3181 be either "HELO" (for SMTP) or "EHLO" (for ESTMP). All other
3182 values will be turned into the default command ("HELO").
3183
3184 <domain> is the domain name to present to the server. It may only be
3185 specified (and is mandatory) if the hello command has been
3186 specified. By default, "localhost" is used.
3187
3188 When "option smtpchk" is set, the health checks will consist in TCP
3189 connections followed by an SMTP command. By default, this command is
3190 "HELO localhost". The server's return code is analyzed and only return codes
3191 starting with a "2" will be considered as valid. All other responses,
3192 including a lack of response will constitute an error and will indicate a
3193 dead server.
3194
3195 This test is meant to be used with SMTP servers or relays. Depending on the
3196 request, it is possible that some servers do not log each connection attempt,
3197 so you may want to experiment to improve the behaviour. Using telnet on port
3198 25 is often easier than adjusting the configuration.
3199
3200 Most often, an incoming SMTP server needs to see the client's IP address for
3201 various purposes, including spam filtering, anti-spoofing and logging. When
3202 possible, it is often wise to masquerade the client's IP address when
3203 connecting to the server using the "usesrc" argument of the "source" keyword,
3204 which requires the cttproxy feature to be compiled in.
3205
3206 Example :
3207 option smtpchk HELO mydomain.org
3208
3209 See also : "option httpchk", "source"
3210
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003211
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02003212option socket-stats
3213no option socket-stats
3214
3215 Enable or disable collecting & providing separate statistics for each socket.
3216 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3217 yes | yes | yes | no
3218
3219 Arguments : none
3220
3221
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +01003222option splice-auto
3223no option splice-auto
3224 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets in both directions
3225 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3226 yes | yes | yes | yes
3227 Arguments : none
3228
3229 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3230 will automatically evaluate the opportunity to use kernel tcp splicing to
3231 forward data between the client and the server, in either direction. Haproxy
3232 uses heuristics to estimate if kernel splicing might improve performance or
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003233 not. Both directions are handled independently. Note that the heuristics used
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +01003234 are not much aggressive in order to limit excessive use of splicing. This
3235 option requires splicing to be enabled at compile time, and may be globally
3236 disabled with the global option "nosplice". Since splice uses pipes, using it
3237 requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3238
3239 Important note: kernel-based TCP splicing is a Linux-specific feature which
3240 first appeared in kernel 2.6.25. It offers kernel-based acceleration to
3241 transfer data between sockets without copying these data to user-space, thus
3242 providing noticeable performance gains and CPU cycles savings. Since many
3243 early implementations are buggy, corrupt data and/or are inefficient, this
3244 feature is not enabled by default, and it should be used with extreme care.
3245 While it is not possible to detect the correctness of an implementation,
3246 2.6.29 is the first version offering a properly working implementation. In
3247 case of doubt, splicing may be globally disabled using the global "nosplice"
3248 keyword.
3249
3250 Example :
3251 option splice-auto
3252
3253 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3254 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3255
3256 See also : "option splice-request", "option splice-response", and global
3257 options "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3258
3259
3260option splice-request
3261no option splice-request
3262 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for requests
3263 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3264 yes | yes | yes | yes
3265 Arguments : none
3266
3267 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3268 will user kernel tcp splicing whenever possible to forward data going from
3269 the client to the server. It might still use the recv/send scheme if there
3270 are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled at
3271 compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice".
3272 Since splice uses pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3273
3274 Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.
3275
3276 Example :
3277 option splice-request
3278
3279 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3280 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3281
3282 See also : "option splice-auto", "option splice-response", and global options
3283 "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3284
3285
3286option splice-response
3287no option splice-response
3288 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for responses
3289 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3290 yes | yes | yes | yes
3291 Arguments : none
3292
3293 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3294 will user kernel tcp splicing whenever possible to forward data going from
3295 the server to the client. It might still use the recv/send scheme if there
3296 are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled at
3297 compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice".
3298 Since splice uses pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3299
3300 Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.
3301
3302 Example :
3303 option splice-response
3304
3305 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3306 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3307
3308 See also : "option splice-auto", "option splice-request", and global options
3309 "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3310
3311
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003312option srvtcpka
3313no option srvtcpka
3314 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the server side
3315 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3316 yes | no | yes | yes
3317 Arguments : none
3318
3319 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
3320 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
3321 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
3322 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
3323
3324 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
3325 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
3326 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
3327 operating system and its tuning parameters.
3328
3329 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
3330 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
3331 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
3332 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
3333 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
3334
3335 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
3336
3337 Using option "srvtcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the
3338 server side of a connection, which should help when session expirations are
3339 noticed between HAProxy and a server.
3340
3341 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3342 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3343
3344 See also : "option clitcpka", "option tcpka"
3345
3346
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003347option ssl-hello-chk
3348 Use SSLv3 client hello health checks for server testing
3349 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3350 yes | no | yes | yes
3351 Arguments : none
3352
3353 When some SSL-based protocols are relayed in TCP mode through HAProxy, it is
3354 possible to test that the server correctly talks SSL instead of just testing
3355 that it accepts the TCP connection. When "option ssl-hello-chk" is set, pure
3356 SSLv3 client hello messages are sent once the connection is established to
3357 the server, and the response is analyzed to find an SSL server hello message.
3358 The server is considered valid only when the response contains this server
3359 hello message.
3360
3361 All servers tested till there correctly reply to SSLv3 client hello messages,
3362 and most servers tested do not even log the requests containing only hello
3363 messages, which is appreciable.
3364
3365 See also: "option httpchk"
3366
3367
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +02003368option tcp-smart-accept
3369no option tcp-smart-accept
3370 Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the accept sequence
3371 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3372 yes | yes | yes | no
3373 Arguments : none
3374
3375 When an HTTP connection request comes in, the system acknowledges it on
3376 behalf of HAProxy, then the client immediately sends its request, and the
3377 system acknowledges it too while it is notifying HAProxy about the new
3378 connection. HAProxy then reads the request and responds. This means that we
3379 have one TCP ACK sent by the system for nothing, because the request could
3380 very well be acknowledged by HAProxy when it sends its response.
3381
3382 For this reason, in HTTP mode, HAProxy automatically asks the system to avoid
3383 sending this useless ACK on platforms which support it (currently at least
3384 Linux). It must not cause any problem, because the system will send it anyway
3385 after 40 ms if the response takes more time than expected to come.
3386
3387 During complex network debugging sessions, it may be desirable to disable
3388 this optimization because delayed ACKs can make troubleshooting more complex
3389 when trying to identify where packets are delayed. It is then possible to
3390 fall back to normal behaviour by specifying "no option tcp-smart-accept".
3391
3392 It is also possible to force it for non-HTTP proxies by simply specifying
3393 "option tcp-smart-accept". For instance, it can make sense with some services
3394 such as SMTP where the server speaks first.
3395
3396 It is recommended to avoid forcing this option in a defaults section. In case
3397 of doubt, consider setting it back to automatic values by prepending the
3398 "default" keyword before it, or disabling it using the "no" keyword.
3399
Willy Tarreaud88edf22009-06-14 15:48:17 +02003400 See also : "option tcp-smart-connect"
3401
3402
3403option tcp-smart-connect
3404no option tcp-smart-connect
3405 Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the connect sequence
3406 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3407 yes | no | yes | yes
3408 Arguments : none
3409
3410 On certain systems (at least Linux), HAProxy can ask the kernel not to
3411 immediately send an empty ACK upon a connection request, but to directly
3412 send the buffer request instead. This saves one packet on the network and
3413 thus boosts performance. It can also be useful for some servers, because they
3414 immediately get the request along with the incoming connection.
3415
3416 This feature is enabled when "option tcp-smart-connect" is set in a backend.
3417 It is not enabled by default because it makes network troubleshooting more
3418 complex.
3419
3420 It only makes sense to enable it with protocols where the client speaks first
3421 such as HTTP. In other situations, if there is no data to send in place of
3422 the ACK, a normal ACK is sent.
3423
3424 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3425 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3426
3427 See also : "option tcp-smart-accept"
3428
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +02003429
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003430option tcpka
3431 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on both sides
3432 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3433 yes | yes | yes | yes
3434 Arguments : none
3435
3436 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
3437 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
3438 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
3439 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
3440
3441 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
3442 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
3443 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
3444 operating system and its tuning parameters.
3445
3446 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
3447 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
3448 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
3449 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
3450 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
3451
3452 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
3453
3454 Using option "tcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on both
3455 the client and server sides of a connection. Note that this is meaningful
3456 only in "defaults" or "listen" sections. If this option is used in a
3457 frontend, only the client side will get keep-alives, and if this option is
3458 used in a backend, only the server side will get keep-alives. For this
3459 reason, it is strongly recommended to explicitly use "option clitcpka" and
3460 "option srvtcpka" when the configuration is split between frontends and
3461 backends.
3462
3463 See also : "option clitcpka", "option srvtcpka"
3464
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003465
3466option tcplog
3467 Enable advanced logging of TCP connections with session state and timers
3468 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3469 yes | yes | yes | yes
3470 Arguments : none
3471
3472 By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the
3473 source and destination addresses, and the instance name. By specifying
3474 "option tcplog", each log line turns into a much richer format including, but
3475 not limited to, the connection timers, the session status, the connections
3476 numbers, the frontend, backend and server name, and of course the source
3477 address and ports. This option is useful for pure TCP proxies in order to
3478 find which of the client or server disconnects or times out. For normal HTTP
3479 proxies, it's better to use "option httplog" which is even more complete.
3480
3481 This option may be set either in the frontend or the backend.
3482
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003483 See also : "option httplog", and section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003484
3485
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003486option transparent
3487no option transparent
3488 Enable client-side transparent proxying
3489 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +01003490 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003491 Arguments : none
3492
3493 This option was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer 3
3494 load balancers. The idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming
3495 connection for a remote address to a local process (here HAProxy), and let
3496 this process know what address was initially requested. When this option is
3497 used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination
3498 IP address of the incoming request (which should match that of another
3499 equipment), while requests with cookies will still be forwarded to the
3500 appropriate server.
3501
3502 Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy
3503 present the client's IP to the server when establishing the connection.
3504
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003505 See also: the "usersrc" argument of the "source" keyword, and the
3506 "transparent" option of the "bind" keyword.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003507
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003508
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003509persist rdp-cookie
3510persist rdp-cookie(name)
3511 Enable RDP cookie-based persistence
3512 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3513 yes | no | yes | yes
3514 Arguments :
3515 <name> is the optional name of the RDP cookie to check. If omitted, the
3516 default cookie name "mstshash" will be used. There currently is
3517 no valid reason to change this name.
3518
3519 This statement enables persistence based on an RDP cookie. The RDP cookie
3520 contains all information required to find the server in the list of known
3521 servers. So when this option is set in the backend, the request is analysed
3522 and if an RDP cookie is found, it is decoded. If it matches a known server
3523 which is still UP (or if "option persist" is set), then the connection is
3524 forwarded to this server.
3525
3526 Note that this only makes sense in a TCP backend, but for this to work, the
3527 frontend must have waited long enough to ensure that an RDP cookie is present
3528 in the request buffer. This is the same requirement as with the "rdp-cookie"
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003529 load-balancing method. Thus it is highly recommended to put all statements in
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003530 a single "listen" section.
3531
3532 Example :
3533 listen tse-farm
3534 bind :3389
3535 # wait up to 5s for an RDP cookie in the request
3536 tcp-request inspect-delay 5s
3537 tcp-request content accept if RDP_COOKIE
3538 # apply RDP cookie persistence
3539 persist rdp-cookie
3540 # if server is unknown, let's balance on the same cookie.
3541 # alternatively, "balance leastconn" may be useful too.
3542 balance rdp-cookie
3543 server srv1 1.1.1.1:3389
3544 server srv2 1.1.1.2:3389
3545
3546 See also : "balance rdp-cookie", "tcp-request" and the "req_rdp_cookie" ACL.
3547
3548
Willy Tarreau3a7d2072009-03-05 23:48:25 +01003549rate-limit sessions <rate>
3550 Set a limit on the number of new sessions accepted per second on a frontend
3551 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3552 yes | yes | yes | no
3553 Arguments :
3554 <rate> The <rate> parameter is an integer designating the maximum number
3555 of new sessions per second to accept on the frontend.
3556
3557 When the frontend reaches the specified number of new sessions per second, it
3558 stops accepting new connections until the rate drops below the limit again.
3559 During this time, the pending sessions will be kept in the socket's backlog
3560 (in system buffers) and haproxy will not even be aware that sessions are
3561 pending. When applying very low limit on a highly loaded service, it may make
3562 sense to increase the socket's backlog using the "backlog" keyword.
3563
3564 This feature is particularly efficient at blocking connection-based attacks
3565 or service abuse on fragile servers. Since the session rate is measured every
3566 millisecond, it is extremely accurate. Also, the limit applies immediately,
3567 no delay is needed at all to detect the threshold.
3568
3569 Example : limit the connection rate on SMTP to 10 per second max
3570 listen smtp
3571 mode tcp
3572 bind :25
3573 rate-limit sessions 10
3574 server 127.0.0.1:1025
3575
3576 Note : when the maximum rate is reached, the frontend's status appears as
3577 "FULL" in the statistics, exactly as when it is saturated.
3578
3579 See also : the "backlog" keyword and the "fe_sess_rate" ACL criterion.
3580
3581
Willy Tarreauf285f542010-01-03 20:03:03 +01003582redirect location <to> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
3583redirect prefix <to> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003584 Return an HTTP redirection if/unless a condition is matched
3585 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3586 no | yes | yes | yes
3587
3588 If/unless the condition is matched, the HTTP request will lead to a redirect
Willy Tarreauf285f542010-01-03 20:03:03 +01003589 response. If no condition is specified, the redirect applies unconditionally.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003590
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003591 Arguments :
3592 <to> With "redirect location", the exact value in <to> is placed into
3593 the HTTP "Location" header. In case of "redirect prefix", the
3594 "Location" header is built from the concatenation of <to> and the
3595 complete URI, including the query string, unless the "drop-query"
Willy Tarreaufe651a52008-11-19 21:15:17 +01003596 option is specified (see below). As a special case, if <to>
3597 equals exactly "/" in prefix mode, then nothing is inserted
3598 before the original URI. It allows one to redirect to the same
3599 URL.
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003600
3601 <code> The code is optional. It indicates which type of HTTP redirection
3602 is desired. Only codes 301, 302 and 303 are supported, and 302 is
3603 used if no code is specified. 301 means "Moved permanently", and
3604 a browser may cache the Location. 302 means "Moved permanently"
3605 and means that the browser should not cache the redirection. 303
3606 is equivalent to 302 except that the browser will fetch the
3607 location with a GET method.
3608
3609 <option> There are several options which can be specified to adjust the
3610 expected behaviour of a redirection :
3611
3612 - "drop-query"
3613 When this keyword is used in a prefix-based redirection, then the
3614 location will be set without any possible query-string, which is useful
3615 for directing users to a non-secure page for instance. It has no effect
3616 with a location-type redirect.
3617
Willy Tarreau81e3b4f2010-01-10 00:42:19 +01003618 - "append-slash"
3619 This keyword may be used in conjunction with "drop-query" to redirect
3620 users who use a URL not ending with a '/' to the same one with the '/'.
3621 It can be useful to ensure that search engines will only see one URL.
3622 For this, a return code 301 is preferred.
3623
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003624 - "set-cookie NAME[=value]"
3625 A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "=value")
3626 to the response. This is sometimes used to indicate that a user has
3627 been seen, for instance to protect against some types of DoS. No other
3628 cookie option is added, so the cookie will be a session cookie. Note
3629 that for a browser, a sole cookie name without an equal sign is
3630 different from a cookie with an equal sign.
3631
3632 - "clear-cookie NAME[=]"
3633 A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "="), but
3634 with the "Max-Age" attribute set to zero. This will tell the browser to
3635 delete this cookie. It is useful for instance on logout pages. It is
3636 important to note that clearing the cookie "NAME" will not remove a
3637 cookie set with "NAME=value". You have to clear the cookie "NAME=" for
3638 that, because the browser makes the difference.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003639
3640 Example: move the login URL only to HTTPS.
3641 acl clear dst_port 80
3642 acl secure dst_port 8080
3643 acl login_page url_beg /login
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003644 acl logout url_beg /logout
Willy Tarreau79da4692008-11-19 20:03:04 +01003645 acl uid_given url_reg /login?userid=[^&]+
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003646 acl cookie_set hdr_sub(cookie) SEEN=1
3647
3648 redirect prefix https://mysite.com set-cookie SEEN=1 if !cookie_set
Willy Tarreau79da4692008-11-19 20:03:04 +01003649 redirect prefix https://mysite.com if login_page !secure
3650 redirect prefix http://mysite.com drop-query if login_page !uid_given
3651 redirect location http://mysite.com/ if !login_page secure
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003652 redirect location / clear-cookie USERID= if logout
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003653
Willy Tarreau81e3b4f2010-01-10 00:42:19 +01003654 Example: send redirects for request for articles without a '/'.
3655 acl missing_slash path_reg ^/article/[^/]*$
3656 redirect code 301 prefix / drop-query append-slash if missing_slash
3657
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003658 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003659
3660
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003661redisp (deprecated)
3662redispatch (deprecated)
3663 Enable or disable session redistribution in case of connection failure
3664 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3665 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003666 Arguments : none
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003667
3668 In HTTP mode, if a server designated by a cookie is down, clients may
3669 definitely stick to it because they cannot flush the cookie, so they will not
3670 be able to access the service anymore.
3671
3672 Specifying "redispatch" will allow the proxy to break their persistence and
3673 redistribute them to a working server.
3674
3675 It also allows to retry last connection to another server in case of multiple
3676 connection failures. Of course, it requires having "retries" set to a nonzero
3677 value.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003678
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003679 This form is deprecated, do not use it in any new configuration, use the new
3680 "option redispatch" instead.
3681
3682 See also : "option redispatch"
3683
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003684
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003685reqadd <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003686 Add a header at the end of the HTTP request
3687 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3688 no | yes | yes | yes
3689 Arguments :
3690 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3691 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003692 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003693
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003694 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3695 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3696
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003697 A new line consisting in <string> followed by a line feed will be added after
3698 the last header of an HTTP request.
3699
3700 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3701 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3702 responses.
3703
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003704 Example : add "X-Proto: SSL" to requests coming via port 81
3705 acl is-ssl dst_port 81
3706 reqadd X-Proto:\ SSL if is-ssl
3707
3708 See also: "rspadd", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and section 7
3709 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003710
3711
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003712reqallow <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3713reqiallow <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003714 Definitely allow an HTTP request if a line matches a regular expression
3715 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3716 no | yes | yes | yes
3717 Arguments :
3718 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3719 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3720 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3721 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3722 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3723 "reqallow" keyword strictly matches case while "reqiallow"
3724 ignores case.
3725
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003726 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3727 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3728
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003729 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3730 <search> will mark the request as allowed, even if any later test would
3731 result in a deny. The test applies both to the request line and to request
3732 headers. Keep in mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003733 header names are not.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003734
3735 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3736 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3737
3738 Example :
3739 # allow www.* but refuse *.local
3740 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3741 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3742
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003743 See also: "reqdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and
3744 section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003745
3746
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003747reqdel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3748reqidel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003749 Delete all headers matching a regular expression in an HTTP request
3750 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3751 no | yes | yes | yes
3752 Arguments :
3753 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3754 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3755 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3756 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3757 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The "reqdel"
3758 keyword strictly matches case while "reqidel" ignores case.
3759
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003760 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3761 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3762
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003763 Any header line matching extended regular expression <search> in the request
3764 will be completely deleted. Most common use of this is to remove unwanted
3765 and/or dangerous headers or cookies from a request before passing it to the
3766 next servers.
3767
3768 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3769 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3770 responses. Keep in mind that header names are not case-sensitive.
3771
3772 Example :
3773 # remove X-Forwarded-For header and SERVER cookie
3774 reqidel ^X-Forwarded-For:.*
3775 reqidel ^Cookie:.*SERVER=
3776
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003777 See also: "reqadd", "reqrep", "rspdel", section 6 about HTTP header
3778 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003779
3780
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003781reqdeny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3782reqideny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003783 Deny an HTTP request if a line matches a regular expression
3784 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3785 no | yes | yes | yes
3786 Arguments :
3787 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3788 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3789 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3790 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3791 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3792 "reqdeny" keyword strictly matches case while "reqideny" ignores
3793 case.
3794
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003795 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3796 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3797
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003798 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3799 <search> will mark the request as denied, even if any later test would
3800 result in an allow. The test applies both to the request line and to request
3801 headers. Keep in mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003802 header names are not.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003803
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003804 A denied request will generate an "HTTP 403 forbidden" response once the
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01003805 complete request has been parsed. This is consistent with what is practiced
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003806 using ACLs.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003807
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003808 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3809 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3810
3811 Example :
3812 # refuse *.local, then allow www.*
3813 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3814 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3815
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003816 See also: "reqallow", "rspdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header
3817 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003818
3819
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003820reqpass <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3821reqipass <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003822 Ignore any HTTP request line matching a regular expression in next rules
3823 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3824 no | yes | yes | yes
3825 Arguments :
3826 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3827 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3828 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3829 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3830 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3831 "reqpass" keyword strictly matches case while "reqipass" ignores
3832 case.
3833
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003834 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3835 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3836
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003837 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3838 <search> will skip next rules, without assigning any deny or allow verdict.
3839 The test applies both to the request line and to request headers. Keep in
3840 mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while header names are not.
3841
3842 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3843 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3844
3845 Example :
3846 # refuse *.local, then allow www.*, but ignore "www.private.local"
3847 reqipass ^Host:\ www.private\.local
3848 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3849 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3850
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003851 See also: "reqallow", "reqdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header
3852 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003853
3854
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003855reqrep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3856reqirep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003857 Replace a regular expression with a string in an HTTP request line
3858 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3859 no | yes | yes | yes
3860 Arguments :
3861 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3862 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3863 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3864 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3865 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The "reqrep"
3866 keyword strictly matches case while "reqirep" ignores case.
3867
3868 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3869 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). References to matched
3870 pattern groups are possible using the common \N form, with N
3871 being a single digit between 0 and 9. Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003872 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003873
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003874 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3875 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3876
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003877 Any line matching extended regular expression <search> in the request (both
3878 the request line and header lines) will be completely replaced with <string>.
3879 Most common use of this is to rewrite URLs or domain names in "Host" headers.
3880
3881 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3882 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3883 responses. Note that for increased readability, it is suggested to add enough
3884 spaces between the request and the response. Keep in mind that URLs in
3885 request line are case-sensitive while header names are not.
3886
3887 Example :
3888 # replace "/static/" with "/" at the beginning of any request path.
3889 reqrep ^([^\ ]*)\ /static/(.*) \1\ /\2
3890 # replace "www.mydomain.com" with "www" in the host name.
3891 reqirep ^Host:\ www.mydomain.com Host:\ www
3892
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003893 See also: "reqadd", "reqdel", "rsprep", section 6 about HTTP header
3894 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003895
3896
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003897reqtarpit <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3898reqitarpit <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003899 Tarpit an HTTP request containing a line matching a regular expression
3900 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3901 no | yes | yes | yes
3902 Arguments :
3903 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3904 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3905 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3906 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3907 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3908 "reqtarpit" keyword strictly matches case while "reqitarpit"
3909 ignores case.
3910
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003911 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3912 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3913
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003914 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3915 <search> will be tarpitted, which means that it will connect to nowhere, will
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003916 be kept open for a pre-defined time, then will return an HTTP error 500 so
3917 that the attacker does not suspect it has been tarpitted. The status 500 will
3918 be reported in the logs, but the completion flags will indicate "PT". The
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003919 delay is defined by "timeout tarpit", or "timeout connect" if the former is
3920 not set.
3921
3922 The goal of the tarpit is to slow down robots attacking servers with
3923 identifiable requests. Many robots limit their outgoing number of connections
3924 and stay connected waiting for a reply which can take several minutes to
3925 come. Depending on the environment and attack, it may be particularly
3926 efficient at reducing the load on the network and firewalls.
3927
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003928 Examples :
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003929 # ignore user-agents reporting any flavour of "Mozilla" or "MSIE", but
3930 # block all others.
3931 reqipass ^User-Agent:\.*(Mozilla|MSIE)
3932 reqitarpit ^User-Agent:
3933
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003934 # block bad guys
3935 acl badguys src 10.1.0.3 172.16.13.20/28
3936 reqitarpit . if badguys
3937
3938 See also: "reqallow", "reqdeny", "reqpass", section 6 about HTTP header
3939 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003940
3941
Willy Tarreaue5c5ce92008-06-20 17:27:19 +02003942retries <value>
3943 Set the number of retries to perform on a server after a connection failure
3944 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3945 yes | no | yes | yes
3946 Arguments :
3947 <value> is the number of times a connection attempt should be retried on
3948 a server when a connection either is refused or times out. The
3949 default value is 3.
3950
3951 It is important to understand that this value applies to the number of
3952 connection attempts, not full requests. When a connection has effectively
3953 been established to a server, there will be no more retry.
3954
3955 In order to avoid immediate reconnections to a server which is restarting,
3956 a turn-around timer of 1 second is applied before a retry occurs.
3957
3958 When "option redispatch" is set, the last retry may be performed on another
3959 server even if a cookie references a different server.
3960
3961 See also : "option redispatch"
3962
3963
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003964rspadd <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003965 Add a header at the end of the HTTP response
3966 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3967 no | yes | yes | yes
3968 Arguments :
3969 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3970 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003971 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003972
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003973 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3974 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3975
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003976 A new line consisting in <string> followed by a line feed will be added after
3977 the last header of an HTTP response.
3978
3979 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3980 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3981 responses.
3982
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003983 See also: "reqadd", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and section 7
3984 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003985
3986
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003987rspdel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3988rspidel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003989 Delete all headers matching a regular expression in an HTTP response
3990 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3991 no | yes | yes | yes
3992 Arguments :
3993 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3994 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
3995 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
3996 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
3997 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
3998 The "rspdel" keyword strictly matches case while "rspidel"
3999 ignores case.
4000
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004001 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4002 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4003
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004004 Any header line matching extended regular expression <search> in the response
4005 will be completely deleted. Most common use of this is to remove unwanted
4006 and/or sensible headers or cookies from a response before passing it to the
4007 client.
4008
4009 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
4010 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
4011 responses. Keep in mind that header names are not case-sensitive.
4012
4013 Example :
4014 # remove the Server header from responses
4015 reqidel ^Server:.*
4016
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004017 See also: "rspadd", "rsprep", "reqdel", section 6 about HTTP header
4018 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004019
4020
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004021rspdeny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
4022rspideny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004023 Block an HTTP response if a line matches a regular expression
4024 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4025 no | yes | yes | yes
4026 Arguments :
4027 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
4028 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
4029 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
4030 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
4031 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
4032 The "rspdeny" keyword strictly matches case while "rspideny"
4033 ignores case.
4034
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004035 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4036 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4037
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004038 A response containing any line which matches extended regular expression
4039 <search> will mark the request as denied. The test applies both to the
4040 response line and to response headers. Keep in mind that header names are not
4041 case-sensitive.
4042
4043 Main use of this keyword is to prevent sensitive information leak and to
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01004044 block the response before it reaches the client. If a response is denied, it
4045 will be replaced with an HTTP 502 error so that the client never retrieves
4046 any sensitive data.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004047
4048 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
4049 Rspdeny should be avoided in new designs.
4050
4051 Example :
4052 # Ensure that no content type matching ms-word will leak
4053 rspideny ^Content-type:\.*/ms-word
4054
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004055 See also: "reqdeny", "acl", "block", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation
4056 and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004057
4058
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004059rsprep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
4060rspirep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004061 Replace a regular expression with a string in an HTTP response line
4062 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4063 no | yes | yes | yes
4064 Arguments :
4065 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
4066 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
4067 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
4068 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
4069 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
4070 The "rsprep" keyword strictly matches case while "rspirep"
4071 ignores case.
4072
4073 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
4074 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). References to matched
4075 pattern groups are possible using the common \N form, with N
4076 being a single digit between 0 and 9. Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004077 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004078
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004079 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4080 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4081
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004082 Any line matching extended regular expression <search> in the response (both
4083 the response line and header lines) will be completely replaced with
4084 <string>. Most common use of this is to rewrite Location headers.
4085
4086 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
4087 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
4088 responses. Note that for increased readability, it is suggested to add enough
4089 spaces between the request and the response. Keep in mind that header names
4090 are not case-sensitive.
4091
4092 Example :
4093 # replace "Location: 127.0.0.1:8080" with "Location: www.mydomain.com"
4094 rspirep ^Location:\ 127.0.0.1:8080 Location:\ www.mydomain.com
4095
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004096 See also: "rspadd", "rspdel", "reqrep", section 6 about HTTP header
4097 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004098
4099
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004100server <name> <address>[:port] [param*]
4101 Declare a server in a backend
4102 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4103 no | no | yes | yes
4104 Arguments :
4105 <name> is the internal name assigned to this server. This name will
4106 appear in logs and alerts.
4107
4108 <address> is the IPv4 address of the server. Alternatively, a resolvable
4109 hostname is supported, but this name will be resolved during
4110 start-up.
4111
4112 <ports> is an optional port specification. If set, all connections will
4113 be sent to this port. If unset, the same port the client
4114 connected to will be used. The port may also be prefixed by a "+"
4115 or a "-". In this case, the server's port will be determined by
4116 adding this value to the client's port.
4117
4118 <param*> is a list of parameters for this server. The "server" keywords
4119 accepts an important number of options and has a complete section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004120 dedicated to it. Please refer to section 5 for more details.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004121
4122 Examples :
4123 server first 10.1.1.1:1080 cookie first check inter 1000
4124 server second 10.1.1.2:1080 cookie second check inter 1000
4125
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01004126 See also: "default-server" and section 5 about server options
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004127
4128
4129source <addr>[:<port>] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]
Willy Tarreaud53f96b2009-02-04 18:46:54 +01004130source <addr>[:<port>] [interface <name>]
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004131 Set the source address for outgoing connections
4132 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4133 yes | no | yes | yes
4134 Arguments :
4135 <addr> is the IPv4 address HAProxy will bind to before connecting to a
4136 server. This address is also used as a source for health checks.
4137 The default value of 0.0.0.0 means that the system will select
4138 the most appropriate address to reach its destination.
4139
4140 <port> is an optional port. It is normally not needed but may be useful
4141 in some very specific contexts. The default value of zero means
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02004142 the system will select a free port. Note that port ranges are not
4143 supported in the backend. If you want to force port ranges, you
4144 have to specify them on each "server" line.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004145
4146 <addr2> is the IP address to present to the server when connections are
4147 forwarded in full transparent proxy mode. This is currently only
4148 supported on some patched Linux kernels. When this address is
4149 specified, clients connecting to the server will be presented
4150 with this address, while health checks will still use the address
4151 <addr>.
4152
4153 <port2> is the optional port to present to the server when connections
4154 are forwarded in full transparent proxy mode (see <addr2> above).
4155 The default value of zero means the system will select a free
4156 port.
4157
Willy Tarreaud53f96b2009-02-04 18:46:54 +01004158 <name> is an optional interface name to which to bind to for outgoing
4159 traffic. On systems supporting this features (currently, only
4160 Linux), this allows one to bind all traffic to the server to
4161 this interface even if it is not the one the system would select
4162 based on routing tables. This should be used with extreme care.
4163 Note that using this option requires root privileges.
4164
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004165 The "source" keyword is useful in complex environments where a specific
4166 address only is allowed to connect to the servers. It may be needed when a
4167 private address must be used through a public gateway for instance, and it is
4168 known that the system cannot determine the adequate source address by itself.
4169
4170 An extension which is available on certain patched Linux kernels may be used
4171 through the "usesrc" optional keyword. It makes it possible to connect to the
4172 servers with an IP address which does not belong to the system itself. This
4173 is called "full transparent proxy mode". For this to work, the destination
4174 servers have to route their traffic back to this address through the machine
4175 running HAProxy, and IP forwarding must generally be enabled on this machine.
4176
4177 In this "full transparent proxy" mode, it is possible to force a specific IP
4178 address to be presented to the servers. This is not much used in fact. A more
4179 common use is to tell HAProxy to present the client's IP address. For this,
4180 there are two methods :
4181
4182 - present the client's IP and port addresses. This is the most transparent
4183 mode, but it can cause problems when IP connection tracking is enabled on
4184 the machine, because a same connection may be seen twice with different
4185 states. However, this solution presents the huge advantage of not
4186 limiting the system to the 64k outgoing address+port couples, because all
4187 of the client ranges may be used.
4188
4189 - present only the client's IP address and select a spare port. This
4190 solution is still quite elegant but slightly less transparent (downstream
4191 firewalls logs will not match upstream's). It also presents the downside
4192 of limiting the number of concurrent connections to the usual 64k ports.
4193 However, since the upstream and downstream ports are different, local IP
4194 connection tracking on the machine will not be upset by the reuse of the
4195 same session.
4196
4197 Note that depending on the transparent proxy technology used, it may be
4198 required to force the source address. In fact, cttproxy version 2 requires an
4199 IP address in <addr> above, and does not support setting of "0.0.0.0" as the
4200 IP address because it creates NAT entries which much match the exact outgoing
4201 address. Tproxy version 4 and some other kernel patches which work in pure
4202 forwarding mode generally will not have this limitation.
4203
4204 This option sets the default source for all servers in the backend. It may
4205 also be specified in a "defaults" section. Finer source address specification
4206 is possible at the server level using the "source" server option. Refer to
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004207 section 5 for more information.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004208
4209 Examples :
4210 backend private
4211 # Connect to the servers using our 192.168.1.200 source address
4212 source 192.168.1.200
4213
4214 backend transparent_ssl1
4215 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address
4216 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip
4217
4218 backend transparent_ssl2
4219 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address and port
4220 # not recommended if IP conntrack is present on the local machine.
4221 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc client
4222
4223 backend transparent_ssl3
4224 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address. It
4225 # is more conntrack-friendly.
4226 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip
4227
4228 backend transparent_smtp
4229 # Connect to the SMTP farm from the client's source address/port
4230 # with Tproxy version 4.
4231 source 0.0.0.0 usesrc clientip
4232
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004233 See also : the "source" server option in section 5, the Tproxy patches for
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004234 the Linux kernel on www.balabit.com, the "bind" keyword.
4235
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01004236
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004237srvtimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
4238 Set the maximum inactivity time on the server side.
4239 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4240 yes | no | yes | yes
4241 Arguments :
4242 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
4243 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4244 as explained at the top of this document.
4245
4246 The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or
4247 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
4248 during the first phase of the server's response, when it has to send the
4249 headers, as it directly represents the server's processing time for the
4250 request. To find out what value to put there, it's often good to start with
4251 what would be considered as unacceptable response times, then check the logs
4252 to observe the response time distribution, and adjust the value accordingly.
4253
4254 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
4255 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
4256 document. In TCP mode (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly
4257 recommended that the client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in
4258 order to avoid complex situations to debug. Whatever the expected server
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01004259 response times, it is a good practice to cover at least one or several TCP
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004260 packet losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01004261 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds minimum).
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004262
4263 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
4264 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
4265 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
4266 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
4267 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
4268 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
4269
4270 This parameter is provided for compatibility but is currently deprecated.
4271 Please use "timeout server" instead.
4272
4273 See also : "timeout server", "timeout client" and "clitimeout".
4274
4275
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004276stats auth <user>:<passwd>
4277 Enable statistics with authentication and grant access to an account
4278 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4279 yes | no | yes | yes
4280 Arguments :
4281 <user> is a user name to grant access to
4282
4283 <passwd> is the cleartext password associated to this user
4284
4285 This statement enables statistics with default settings, and restricts access
4286 to declared users only. It may be repeated as many times as necessary to
4287 allow as many users as desired. When a user tries to access the statistics
4288 without a valid account, a "401 Forbidden" response will be returned so that
4289 the browser asks the user to provide a valid user and password. The real
4290 which will be returned to the browser is configurable using "stats realm".
4291
4292 Since the authentication method is HTTP Basic Authentication, the passwords
4293 circulate in cleartext on the network. Thus, it was decided that the
4294 configuration file would also use cleartext passwords to remind the users
4295 that those ones should not be sensible and not shared with any other account.
4296
4297 It is also possible to reduce the scope of the proxies which appear in the
4298 report using "stats scope".
4299
4300 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4301 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4302 unobvious parameters.
4303
4304 Example :
4305 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4306 backend public_www
4307 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4308 stats enable
4309 stats hide-version
4310 stats scope .
4311 stats uri /admin?stats
4312 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4313 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4314 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4315
4316 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4317 backend private_monitoring
4318 stats enable
4319 stats uri /admin?stats
4320 stats refresh 5s
4321
4322 See also : "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats scope", "stats uri"
4323
4324
4325stats enable
4326 Enable statistics reporting with default settings
4327 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4328 yes | no | yes | yes
4329 Arguments : none
4330
4331 This statement enables statistics reporting with default settings defined
4332 at build time. Unless stated otherwise, these settings are used :
4333 - stats uri : /haproxy?stats
4334 - stats realm : "HAProxy Statistics"
4335 - stats auth : no authentication
4336 - stats scope : no restriction
4337
4338 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4339 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4340 unobvious parameters.
4341
4342 Example :
4343 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4344 backend public_www
4345 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4346 stats enable
4347 stats hide-version
4348 stats scope .
4349 stats uri /admin?stats
4350 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4351 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4352 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4353
4354 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4355 backend private_monitoring
4356 stats enable
4357 stats uri /admin?stats
4358 stats refresh 5s
4359
4360 See also : "stats auth", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4361
4362
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004363stats hide-version
4364 Enable statistics and hide HAProxy version reporting
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004365 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4366 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004367 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004368
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004369 By default, the stats page reports some useful status information along with
4370 the statistics. Among them is HAProxy's version. However, it is generally
4371 considered dangerous to report precise version to anyone, as it can help them
4372 target known weaknesses with specific attacks. The "stats hide-version"
4373 statement removes the version from the statistics report. This is recommended
4374 for public sites or any site with a weak login/password.
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004375
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004376 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4377 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4378 unobvious parameters.
4379
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004380 Example :
4381 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4382 backend public_www
4383 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004384 stats enable
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004385 stats hide-version
4386 stats scope .
4387 stats uri /admin?stats
4388 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4389 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4390 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004391
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004392 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4393 backend private_monitoring
4394 stats enable
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004395 stats uri /admin?stats
4396 stats refresh 5s
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki15514c22010-01-04 16:03:09 +01004397
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004398 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004399
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01004400
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004401stats realm <realm>
4402 Enable statistics and set authentication realm
4403 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4404 yes | no | yes | yes
4405 Arguments :
4406 <realm> is the name of the HTTP Basic Authentication realm reported to
4407 the browser. The browser uses it to display it in the pop-up
4408 inviting the user to enter a valid username and password.
4409
4410 The realm is read as a single word, so any spaces in it should be escaped
4411 using a backslash ('\').
4412
4413 This statement is useful only in conjunction with "stats auth" since it is
4414 only related to authentication.
4415
4416 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4417 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4418 unobvious parameters.
4419
4420 Example :
4421 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4422 backend public_www
4423 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4424 stats enable
4425 stats hide-version
4426 stats scope .
4427 stats uri /admin?stats
4428 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4429 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4430 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4431
4432 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4433 backend private_monitoring
4434 stats enable
4435 stats uri /admin?stats
4436 stats refresh 5s
4437
4438 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats uri"
4439
4440
4441stats refresh <delay>
4442 Enable statistics with automatic refresh
4443 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4444 yes | no | yes | yes
4445 Arguments :
4446 <delay> is the suggested refresh delay, specified in seconds, which will
4447 be returned to the browser consulting the report page. While the
4448 browser is free to apply any delay, it will generally respect it
4449 and refresh the page this every seconds. The refresh interval may
4450 be specified in any other non-default time unit, by suffixing the
4451 unit after the value, as explained at the top of this document.
4452
4453 This statement is useful on monitoring displays with a permanent page
4454 reporting the load balancer's activity. When set, the HTML report page will
4455 include a link "refresh"/"stop refresh" so that the user can select whether
4456 he wants automatic refresh of the page or not.
4457
4458 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4459 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4460 unobvious parameters.
4461
4462 Example :
4463 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4464 backend public_www
4465 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4466 stats enable
4467 stats hide-version
4468 stats scope .
4469 stats uri /admin?stats
4470 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4471 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4472 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4473
4474 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4475 backend private_monitoring
4476 stats enable
4477 stats uri /admin?stats
4478 stats refresh 5s
4479
4480 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4481
4482
4483stats scope { <name> | "." }
4484 Enable statistics and limit access scope
4485 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4486 yes | no | yes | yes
4487 Arguments :
4488 <name> is the name of a listen, frontend or backend section to be
4489 reported. The special name "." (a single dot) designates the
4490 section in which the statement appears.
4491
4492 When this statement is specified, only the sections enumerated with this
4493 statement will appear in the report. All other ones will be hidden. This
4494 statement may appear as many times as needed if multiple sections need to be
4495 reported. Please note that the name checking is performed as simple string
4496 comparisons, and that it is never checked that a give section name really
4497 exists.
4498
4499 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4500 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4501 unobvious parameters.
4502
4503 Example :
4504 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4505 backend public_www
4506 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4507 stats enable
4508 stats hide-version
4509 stats scope .
4510 stats uri /admin?stats
4511 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4512 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4513 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4514
4515 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4516 backend private_monitoring
4517 stats enable
4518 stats uri /admin?stats
4519 stats refresh 5s
4520
4521 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4522
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004523
4524stats show-desc [ <description> ]
4525 Enable reporting of a description on the statistics page.
4526 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4527 yes | no | yes | yes
4528
4529 <name> is an optional description to be reported. If unspecified, the
4530 description from global section is automatically used instead.
4531
4532 This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their
4533 customers, where node or description should be different for each customer.
4534
4535 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4536 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4537 unobvious parameters.
4538
4539 Example :
4540 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4541 backend private_monitoring
4542 stats enable
4543 stats show-desc Master node for Europe, Asia, Africa
4544 stats uri /admin?stats
4545 stats refresh 5s
4546
4547 See also: "show-node", "stats enable", "stats uri" and "description" in
4548 global section.
4549
4550
4551stats show-legends
4552 Enable reporting additional informations on the statistics page :
4553 - cap: capabilities (proxy)
4554 - mode: one of tcp, http or health (proxy)
4555 - id: SNMP ID (proxy, socket, server)
4556 - IP (socket, server)
4557 - cookie (backend, server)
4558
4559 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4560 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4561 unobvious parameters.
4562
4563 See also: "stats enable", "stats uri".
4564
4565
4566stats show-node [ <name> ]
4567 Enable reporting of a host name on the statistics page.
4568 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4569 yes | no | yes | yes
4570 Arguments:
4571 <name> is an optional name to be reported. If unspecified, the
4572 node name from global section is automatically used instead.
4573
4574 This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their
4575 customers, where node or description might be different on a stats page
4576 provided for each customer.
4577
4578 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4579 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4580 unobvious parameters.
4581
4582 Example:
4583 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4584 backend private_monitoring
4585 stats enable
4586 stats show-node Europe-1
4587 stats uri /admin?stats
4588 stats refresh 5s
4589
4590 See also: "show-desc", "stats enable", "stats uri", and "node" in global
4591 section.
4592
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004593
4594stats uri <prefix>
4595 Enable statistics and define the URI prefix to access them
4596 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4597 yes | no | yes | yes
4598 Arguments :
4599 <prefix> is the prefix of any URI which will be redirected to stats. This
4600 prefix may contain a question mark ('?') to indicate part of a
4601 query string.
4602
4603 The statistics URI is intercepted on the relayed traffic, so it appears as a
4604 page within the normal application. It is strongly advised to ensure that the
4605 selected URI will never appear in the application, otherwise it will never be
4606 possible to reach it in the application.
4607
4608 The default URI compiled in haproxy is "/haproxy?stats", but this may be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004609 changed at build time, so it's better to always explicitly specify it here.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004610 It is generally a good idea to include a question mark in the URI so that
4611 intermediate proxies refrain from caching the results. Also, since any string
4612 beginning with the prefix will be accepted as a stats request, the question
4613 mark helps ensuring that no valid URI will begin with the same words.
4614
4615 It is sometimes very convenient to use "/" as the URI prefix, and put that
4616 statement in a "listen" instance of its own. That makes it easy to dedicate
4617 an address or a port to statistics only.
4618
4619 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4620 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4621 unobvious parameters.
4622
4623 Example :
4624 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4625 backend public_www
4626 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4627 stats enable
4628 stats hide-version
4629 stats scope .
4630 stats uri /admin?stats
4631 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4632 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4633 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4634
4635 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4636 backend private_monitoring
4637 stats enable
4638 stats uri /admin?stats
4639 stats refresh 5s
4640
4641 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm"
4642
4643
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004644stick match <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <cond>]
4645 Define a request pattern matching condition to stick a user to a server
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004646 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004647 no | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01004648
4649 Arguments :
4650 <pattern> is a pattern extraction rule as described in section 7.8. It
4651 describes what elements of the incoming request or connection
4652 will be analysed in the hope to find a matching entry in a
4653 stickiness table. This rule is mandatory.
4654
4655 <table> is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
4656 backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
4657 the "stick-table" statement.
4658
4659 <cond> is an optional matching condition. It makes it possible to match
4660 on a certain criterion only when other conditions are met (or
4661 not met). For instance, it could be used to match on a source IP
4662 address except when a request passes through a known proxy, in
4663 which case we'd match on a header containing that IP address.
4664
4665 Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot
4666 always simply rely on cookies nor hashing. The "stick match" statement
4667 describes a rule to extract the stickiness criterion from an incoming request
4668 or connection. See section 7 for a complete list of possible patterns and
4669 transformation rules.
4670
4671 The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of
4672 a type compatible with the pattern. By default it is the one which is present
4673 in the same backend. It is possible to share a table with other backends by
4674 referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is referenced,
4675 the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs
4676 start at 1 in each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of
4677 doubt, it is highly recommended to force server IDs using their "id" setting.
4678
4679 It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick match" statement
4680 will apply, using "if" or "unless" followed by a condition. See section 7 for
4681 ACL based conditions.
4682
4683 There is no limit on the number of "stick match" statements. The first that
4684 applies and matches will cause the request to be directed to the same server
4685 as was used for the request which created the entry. That way, multiple
4686 matches can be used as fallbacks.
4687
4688 The stick rules are checked after the persistence cookies, so they will not
4689 affect stickiness if a cookie has already been used to select a server. That
4690 way, it becomes very easy to insert cookies and match on IP addresses in
4691 order to maintain stickiness between HTTP and HTTPS.
4692
4693 Example :
4694 # forward SMTP users to the same server they just used for POP in the
4695 # last 30 minutes
4696 backend pop
4697 mode tcp
4698 balance roundrobin
4699 stick store-request src
4700 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4701 server s1 192.168.1.1:110
4702 server s2 192.168.1.1:110
4703
4704 backend smtp
4705 mode tcp
4706 balance roundrobin
4707 stick match src table pop
4708 server s1 192.168.1.1:25
4709 server s2 192.168.1.1:25
4710
4711 See also : "stick-table", "stick on", and section 7 about ACLs and pattern
4712 extraction.
4713
4714
4715stick on <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
4716 Define a request pattern to associate a user to a server
4717 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4718 no | no | yes | yes
4719
4720 Note : This form is exactly equivalent to "stick match" followed by
4721 "stick store-request", all with the same arguments. Please refer
4722 to both keywords for details. It is only provided as a convenience
4723 for writing more maintainable configurations.
4724
4725 Examples :
4726 # The following form ...
Willy Tarreauec579d82010-02-26 19:15:04 +01004727 stick on src table pop if !localhost
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01004728
4729 # ...is strictly equivalent to this one :
4730 stick match src table pop if !localhost
4731 stick store-request src table pop if !localhost
4732
4733
4734 # Use cookie persistence for HTTP, and stick on source address for HTTPS as
4735 # well as HTTP without cookie. Share the same table between both accesses.
4736 backend http
4737 mode http
4738 balance roundrobin
4739 stick on src table https
4740 cookie SRV insert indirect nocache
4741 server s1 192.168.1.1:80 cookie s1
4742 server s2 192.168.1.1:80 cookie s2
4743
4744 backend https
4745 mode tcp
4746 balance roundrobin
4747 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4748 stick on src
4749 server s1 192.168.1.1:443
4750 server s2 192.168.1.1:443
4751
4752 See also : "stick match" and "stick store-request"
4753
4754
4755stick store-request <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
4756 Define a request pattern used to create an entry in a stickiness table
4757 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4758 no | no | yes | yes
4759
4760 Arguments :
4761 <pattern> is a pattern extraction rule as described in section 7.8. It
4762 describes what elements of the incoming request or connection
4763 will be analysed, extracted and stored in the table once a
4764 server is selected.
4765
4766 <table> is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
4767 backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
4768 the "stick-table" statement.
4769
4770 <cond> is an optional storage condition. It makes it possible to store
4771 certain criteria only when some conditions are met (or not met).
4772 For instance, it could be used to store the source IP address
4773 except when the request passes through a known proxy, in which
4774 case we'd store a converted form of a header containing that IP
4775 address.
4776
4777 Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot
4778 always simply rely on cookies nor hashing. The "stick store-request" statement
4779 describes a rule to decide what to extract from the request and when to do
4780 it, in order to store it into a stickiness table for further requests to
4781 match it using the "stick match" statement. Obviously the extracted part must
4782 make sense and have a chance to be matched in a further request. Storing a
4783 client's IP address for instance often makes sense. Storing an ID found in a
4784 URL parameter also makes sense. Storing a source port will almost never make
4785 any sense because it will be randomly matched. See section 7 for a complete
4786 list of possible patterns and transformation rules.
4787
4788 The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of
4789 a type compatible with the pattern. By default it is the one which is present
4790 in the same backend. It is possible to share a table with other backends by
4791 referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is referenced,
4792 the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs
4793 start at 1 in each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of
4794 doubt, it is highly recommended to force server IDs using their "id" setting.
4795
4796 It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick store-request"
4797 statement will apply, using "if" or "unless" followed by a condition. This
4798 condition will be evaluated while parsing the request, so any criteria can be
4799 used. See section 7 for ACL based conditions.
4800
4801 There is no limit on the number of "stick store-request" statements, but
4802 there is a limit of 8 simultaneous stores per request or response. This
4803 makes it possible to store up to 8 criteria, all extracted from either the
4804 request or the response, regardless of the number of rules. Only the 8 first
4805 ones which match will be kept. Using this, it is possible to feed multiple
4806 tables at once in the hope to increase the chance to recognize a user on
4807 another protocol or access method.
4808
4809 The "store-request" rules are evaluated once the server connection has been
4810 established, so that the table will contain the real server that processed
4811 the request.
4812
4813 Example :
4814 # forward SMTP users to the same server they just used for POP in the
4815 # last 30 minutes
4816 backend pop
4817 mode tcp
4818 balance roundrobin
4819 stick store-request src
4820 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4821 server s1 192.168.1.1:110
4822 server s2 192.168.1.1:110
4823
4824 backend smtp
4825 mode tcp
4826 balance roundrobin
4827 stick match src table pop
4828 server s1 192.168.1.1:25
4829 server s2 192.168.1.1:25
4830
4831 See also : "stick-table", "stick on", and section 7 about ACLs and pattern
4832 extraction.
4833
4834
4835stick-table type {ip | integer | string [len <length>] } size <size>
4836 [expire <expire>] [nopurge]
4837 Configure the stickiness table for the current backend
4838 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4839 no | no | yes | yes
4840
4841 Arguments :
4842 ip a table declared with "type ip" will only store IPv4 addresses.
4843 This form is very compact (about 50 bytes per entry) and allows
4844 very fast entry lookup and stores with almost no overhead. This
4845 is mainly used to store client source IP addresses.
4846
4847 integer a table declared with "type integer" will store 32bit integers
4848 which can represent a client identifier found in a request for
4849 instance.
4850
4851 string a table declared with "type string" will store substrings of up
4852 to <len> characters. If the string provided by the pattern
4853 extractor is larger than <len>, it will be truncated before
4854 being stored. During matching, at most <len> characters will be
4855 compared between the string in the table and the extracted
4856 pattern. When not specified, the string is automatically limited
4857 to 31 characters.
4858
4859 <length> is the maximum number of characters that will be stored in a
4860 "string" type table. See type "string" above. Be careful when
4861 changing this parameter as memory usage will proportionally
4862 increase.
4863
4864 <size> is the maximum number of entries that can fit in the table. This
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01004865 value directly impacts memory usage. Count approximately
4866 50 bytes per entry, plus the size of a string if any. The size
4867 supports suffixes "k", "m", "g" for 2^10, 2^20 and 2^30 factors.
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01004868
4869 [nopurge] indicates that we refuse to purge older entries when the table
4870 is full. When not specified and the table is full when haproxy
4871 wants to store an entry in it, it will flush a few of the oldest
4872 entries in order to release some space for the new ones. This is
4873 most often the desired behaviour. In some specific cases, it
4874 be desirable to refuse new entries instead of purging the older
4875 ones. That may be the case when the amount of data to store is
4876 far above the hardware limits and we prefer not to offer access
4877 to new clients than to reject the ones already connected. When
4878 using this parameter, be sure to properly set the "expire"
4879 parameter (see below).
4880
4881 <expire> defines the maximum duration of an entry in the table since it
4882 was last created, refreshed or matched. The expiration delay is
4883 defined using the standard time format, similarly as the various
4884 timeouts. The maximum duration is slightly above 24 days. See
4885 section 2.2 for more information. If this delay is not specified,
4886 the session won't automatically expire, but older entries will
4887 be removed once full. Be sure not to use the "nopurge" parameter
4888 if not expiration delay is specified.
4889
4890 The is only one stick-table per backend. At the moment of writing this doc,
4891 it does not seem useful to have multiple tables per backend. If this happens
4892 to be required, simply create a dummy backend with a stick-table in it and
4893 reference it.
4894
4895 It is important to understand that stickiness based on learning information
4896 has some limitations, including the fact that all learned associations are
4897 lost upon restart. In general it can be good as a complement but not always
4898 as an exclusive stickiness.
4899
4900 See also : "stick match", "stick on", "stick store-request", and section 2.2
4901 about time format.
4902
4903
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004904tcp-request content accept [{if | unless} <condition>]
4905 Accept a connection if/unless a content inspection condition is matched
4906 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4907 no | yes | yes | no
4908
4909 During TCP content inspection, the connection is immediately validated if the
4910 condition is true (when used with "if") or false (when used with "unless").
4911 Most of the time during content inspection, a condition will be in an
4912 uncertain state which is neither true nor false. The evaluation immediately
4913 stops when such a condition is encountered. It is important to understand
4914 that "accept" and "reject" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration
4915 order, so that it is possible to build complex rules from them. There is no
4916 specific limit to the number of rules which may be inserted.
4917
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004918 Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004919 the action, it is simply performed unconditionally.
4920
4921 If no "tcp-request content" rules are matched, the default action already is
4922 "accept". Thus, this statement alone does not bring anything without another
4923 "reject" statement.
4924
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004925 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004926
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02004927 See also : "tcp-request content reject", "tcp-request inspect-delay"
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004928
4929
4930tcp-request content reject [{if | unless} <condition>]
4931 Reject a connection if/unless a content inspection condition is matched
4932 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4933 no | yes | yes | no
4934
4935 During TCP content inspection, the connection is immediately rejected if the
4936 condition is true (when used with "if") or false (when used with "unless").
4937 Most of the time during content inspection, a condition will be in an
4938 uncertain state which is neither true nor false. The evaluation immediately
4939 stops when such a condition is encountered. It is important to understand
4940 that "accept" and "reject" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration
4941 order, so that it is possible to build complex rules from them. There is no
4942 specific limit to the number of rules which may be inserted.
4943
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004944 Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004945 the action, it is simply performed unconditionally.
4946
4947 If no "tcp-request content" rules are matched, the default action is set to
4948 "accept".
4949
4950 Example:
4951 # reject SMTP connection if client speaks first
4952 tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
4953 acl content_present req_len gt 0
4954 tcp-request reject if content_present
4955
4956 # Forward HTTPS connection only if client speaks
4957 tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
4958 acl content_present req_len gt 0
4959 tcp-request accept if content_present
4960 tcp-request reject
4961
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004962 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004963
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02004964 See also : "tcp-request content accept", "tcp-request inspect-delay"
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004965
4966
4967tcp-request inspect-delay <timeout>
4968 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for data during content inspection
4969 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4970 no | yes | yes | no
4971 Arguments :
4972 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
4973 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4974 as explained at the top of this document.
4975
4976 People using haproxy primarily as a TCP relay are often worried about the
4977 risk of passing any type of protocol to a server without any analysis. In
4978 order to be able to analyze the request contents, we must first withhold
4979 the data then analyze them. This statement simply enables withholding of
4980 data for at most the specified amount of time.
4981
4982 Note that when performing content inspection, haproxy will evaluate the whole
4983 rules for every new chunk which gets in, taking into account the fact that
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004984 those data are partial. If no rule matches before the aforementioned delay,
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004985 a last check is performed upon expiration, this time considering that the
Willy Tarreaud869b242009-03-15 14:43:58 +01004986 contents are definitive. If no delay is set, haproxy will not wait at all
4987 and will immediately apply a verdict based on the available information.
4988 Obviously this is unlikely to be very useful and might even be racy, so such
4989 setups are not recommended.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004990
4991 As soon as a rule matches, the request is released and continues as usual. If
4992 the timeout is reached and no rule matches, the default policy will be to let
4993 it pass through unaffected.
4994
4995 For most protocols, it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients
4996 send the full request immediately upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to
4997 cover TCP retransmits but that's all. For some protocols, it may make sense
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01004998 to use large values, for instance to ensure that the client never talks
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004999 before the server (eg: SMTP), or to wait for a client to talk before passing
5000 data to the server (eg: SSL). Note that the client timeout must cover at
5001 least the inspection delay, otherwise it will expire first.
5002
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005003 See also : "tcp-request content accept", "tcp-request content reject",
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005004 "timeout client".
5005
5006
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005007timeout check <timeout>
5008 Set additional check timeout, but only after a connection has been already
5009 established.
5010
5011 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5012 yes | no | yes | yes
5013 Arguments:
5014 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5015 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5016 as explained at the top of this document.
5017
5018 If set, haproxy uses min("timeout connect", "inter") as a connect timeout
5019 for check and "timeout check" as an additional read timeout. The "min" is
5020 used so that people running with *very* long "timeout connect" (eg. those
5021 who needed this due to the queue or tarpit) do not slow down their checks.
Willy Tarreaud7550a22010-02-10 05:10:19 +01005022 (Please also note that there is no valid reason to have such long connect
5023 timeouts, because "timeout queue" and "timeout tarpit" can always be used to
5024 avoid that).
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005025
5026 If "timeout check" is not set haproxy uses "inter" for complete check
5027 timeout (connect + read) exactly like all <1.3.15 version.
5028
5029 In most cases check request is much simpler and faster to handle than normal
5030 requests and people may want to kick out laggy servers so this timeout should
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005031 be smaller than "timeout server".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005032
5033 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5034 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5035 forget about it.
5036
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005037 See also: "timeout connect", "timeout queue", "timeout server",
5038 "timeout tarpit".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005039
5040
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005041timeout client <timeout>
5042timeout clitimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5043 Set the maximum inactivity time on the client side.
5044 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5045 yes | yes | yes | no
5046 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005047 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005048 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5049 as explained at the top of this document.
5050
5051 The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or
5052 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
5053 during the first phase, when the client sends the request, and during the
5054 response while it is reading data sent by the server. The value is specified
5055 in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
5056 suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP mode
5057 (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the
5058 client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in order to avoid complex
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005059 situations to debug. It is a good practice to cover one or several TCP packet
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005060 losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds
5061 (eg: 4 or 5 seconds).
5062
5063 This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in
5064 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5065 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5066 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5067 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
5068 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5069
5070 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "clitimeout". It is recommended
5071 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout clitimeout" is
5072 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5073
5074 See also : "clitimeout", "timeout server".
5075
5076
5077timeout connect <timeout>
5078timeout contimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5079 Set the maximum time to wait for a connection attempt to a server to succeed.
5080 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5081 yes | no | yes | yes
5082 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005083 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005084 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5085 as explained at the top of this document.
5086
5087 If the server is located on the same LAN as haproxy, the connection should be
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005088 immediate (less than a few milliseconds). Anyway, it is a good practice to
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005089 cover one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005090 slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds). By default, the
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005091 connect timeout also presets both queue and tarpit timeouts to the same value
5092 if these have not been specified.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005093
5094 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5095 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5096 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5097 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5098 during startup because it may results in accumulation of failed sessions in
5099 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5100
5101 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "contimeout". It is recommended
5102 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout contimeout" is
5103 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5104
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005105 See also: "timeout check", "timeout queue", "timeout server", "contimeout",
5106 "timeout tarpit".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005107
5108
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005109timeout http-keep-alive <timeout>
5110 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a new HTTP request to appear
5111 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5112 yes | yes | yes | yes
5113 Arguments :
5114 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5115 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5116 as explained at the top of this document.
5117
5118 By default, the time to wait for a new request in case of keep-alive is set
5119 by "timeout http-request". However this is not always convenient because some
5120 people want very short keep-alive timeouts in order to release connections
5121 faster, and others prefer to have larger ones but still have short timeouts
5122 once the request has started to present itself.
5123
5124 The "http-keep-alive" timeout covers these needs. It will define how long to
5125 wait for a new HTTP request to start coming after a response was sent. Once
5126 the first byte of request has been seen, the "http-request" timeout is used
5127 to wait for the complete request to come. Note that empty lines prior to a
5128 new request do not refresh the timeout and are not counted as a new request.
5129
5130 There is also another difference between the two timeouts : when a connection
5131 expires during timeout http-keep-alive, no error is returned, the connection
5132 just closes. If the connection expires in "http-request" while waiting for a
5133 connection to complete, a HTTP 408 error is returned.
5134
5135 In general it is optimal to set this value to a few tens to hundreds of
5136 milliseconds, to allow users to fetch all objects of a page at once but
5137 without waiting for further clicks. Also, if set to a very small value (eg:
5138 1 millisecond) it will probably only accept pipelined requests but not the
5139 non-pipelined ones. It may be a nice trade-off for very large sites running
5140 with tends to hundreds of thousands of clients.
5141
5142 If this parameter is not set, the "http-request" timeout applies, and if both
5143 are not set, "timeout client" still applies at the lower level. It should be
5144 set in the frontend to take effect, unless the frontend is in TCP mode, in
5145 which case the HTTP backend's timeout will be used.
5146
5147 See also : "timeout http-request", "timeout client".
5148
5149
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005150timeout http-request <timeout>
5151 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a complete HTTP request
5152 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +02005153 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005154 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005155 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005156 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5157 as explained at the top of this document.
5158
5159 In order to offer DoS protection, it may be required to lower the maximum
5160 accepted time to receive a complete HTTP request without affecting the client
5161 timeout. This helps protecting against established connections on which
5162 nothing is sent. The client timeout cannot offer a good protection against
5163 this abuse because it is an inactivity timeout, which means that if the
5164 attacker sends one character every now and then, the timeout will not
5165 trigger. With the HTTP request timeout, no matter what speed the client
5166 types, the request will be aborted if it does not complete in time.
5167
5168 Note that this timeout only applies to the header part of the request, and
5169 not to any data. As soon as the empty line is received, this timeout is not
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005170 used anymore. It is used again on keep-alive connections to wait for a second
5171 request if "timeout http-keep-alive" is not set.
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005172
5173 Generally it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients send the
5174 full request immediately upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to cover TCP
5175 retransmits but that's all. Setting it to very low values (eg: 50 ms) will
5176 generally work on local networks as long as there are no packet losses. This
5177 will prevent people from sending bare HTTP requests using telnet.
5178
5179 If this parameter is not set, the client timeout still applies between each
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +02005180 chunk of the incoming request. It should be set in the frontend to take
5181 effect, unless the frontend is in TCP mode, in which case the HTTP backend's
5182 timeout will be used.
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005183
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005184 See also : "timeout http-keep-alive", "timeout client".
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005185
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005186
5187timeout queue <timeout>
5188 Set the maximum time to wait in the queue for a connection slot to be free
5189 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5190 yes | no | yes | yes
5191 Arguments :
5192 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5193 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5194 as explained at the top of this document.
5195
5196 When a server's maxconn is reached, connections are left pending in a queue
5197 which may be server-specific or global to the backend. In order not to wait
5198 indefinitely, a timeout is applied to requests pending in the queue. If the
5199 timeout is reached, it is considered that the request will almost never be
5200 served, so it is dropped and a 503 error is returned to the client.
5201
5202 The "timeout queue" statement allows to fix the maximum time for a request to
5203 be left pending in a queue. If unspecified, the same value as the backend's
5204 connection timeout ("timeout connect") is used, for backwards compatibility
5205 with older versions with no "timeout queue" parameter.
5206
5207 See also : "timeout connect", "contimeout".
5208
5209
5210timeout server <timeout>
5211timeout srvtimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5212 Set the maximum inactivity time on the server side.
5213 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5214 yes | no | yes | yes
5215 Arguments :
5216 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5217 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5218 as explained at the top of this document.
5219
5220 The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or
5221 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
5222 during the first phase of the server's response, when it has to send the
5223 headers, as it directly represents the server's processing time for the
5224 request. To find out what value to put there, it's often good to start with
5225 what would be considered as unacceptable response times, then check the logs
5226 to observe the response time distribution, and adjust the value accordingly.
5227
5228 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
5229 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
5230 document. In TCP mode (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly
5231 recommended that the client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in
5232 order to avoid complex situations to debug. Whatever the expected server
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005233 response times, it is a good practice to cover at least one or several TCP
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005234 packet losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005235 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds minimum).
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005236
5237 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5238 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5239 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5240 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5241 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
5242 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5243
5244 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "srvtimeout". It is recommended
5245 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout srvtimeout" is
5246 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5247
5248 See also : "srvtimeout", "timeout client".
5249
5250
5251timeout tarpit <timeout>
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01005252 Set the duration for which tarpitted connections will be maintained
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005253 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5254 yes | yes | yes | yes
5255 Arguments :
5256 <timeout> is the tarpit duration specified in milliseconds by default, but
5257 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5258 as explained at the top of this document.
5259
5260 When a connection is tarpitted using "reqtarpit", it is maintained open with
5261 no activity for a certain amount of time, then closed. "timeout tarpit"
5262 defines how long it will be maintained open.
5263
5264 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
5265 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
5266 document. If unspecified, the same value as the backend's connection timeout
5267 ("timeout connect") is used, for backwards compatibility with older versions
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01005268 with no "timeout tarpit" parameter.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005269
5270 See also : "timeout connect", "contimeout".
5271
5272
5273transparent (deprecated)
5274 Enable client-side transparent proxying
5275 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +01005276 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005277 Arguments : none
5278
5279 This keyword was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer
5280 3 load balancers. The idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming
5281 connection for a remote address to a local process (here HAProxy), and let
5282 this process know what address was initially requested. When this option is
5283 used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination
5284 IP address of the incoming request (which should match that of another
5285 equipment), while requests with cookies will still be forwarded to the
5286 appropriate server.
5287
5288 The "transparent" keyword is deprecated, use "option transparent" instead.
5289
5290 Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy
5291 present the client's IP to the server when establishing the connection.
5292
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005293 See also: "option transparent"
5294
5295
5296use_backend <backend> if <condition>
5297use_backend <backend> unless <condition>
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005298 Switch to a specific backend if/unless an ACL-based condition is matched.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005299 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5300 no | yes | yes | no
5301 Arguments :
5302 <backend> is the name of a valid backend or "listen" section.
5303
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005304 <condition> is a condition composed of ACLs, as described in section 7.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005305
5306 When doing content-switching, connections arrive on a frontend and are then
5307 dispatched to various backends depending on a number of conditions. The
5308 relation between the conditions and the backends is described with the
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005309 "use_backend" keyword. While it is normally used with HTTP processing, it can
5310 also be used in pure TCP, either without content using stateless ACLs (eg:
5311 source address validation) or combined with a "tcp-request" rule to wait for
5312 some payload.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005313
5314 There may be as many "use_backend" rules as desired. All of these rules are
5315 evaluated in their declaration order, and the first one which matches will
5316 assign the backend.
5317
5318 In the first form, the backend will be used if the condition is met. In the
5319 second form, the backend will be used if the condition is not met. If no
5320 condition is valid, the backend defined with "default_backend" will be used.
5321 If no default backend is defined, either the servers in the same section are
5322 used (in case of a "listen" section) or, in case of a frontend, no server is
5323 used and a 503 service unavailable response is returned.
5324
Willy Tarreau51aecc72009-07-12 09:47:04 +02005325 Note that it is possible to switch from a TCP frontend to an HTTP backend. In
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005326 this case, either the frontend has already checked that the protocol is HTTP,
Willy Tarreau51aecc72009-07-12 09:47:04 +02005327 and backend processing will immediately follow, or the backend will wait for
5328 a complete HTTP request to get in. This feature is useful when a frontend
5329 must decode several protocols on a unique port, one of them being HTTP.
5330
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005331 See also: "default_backend", "tcp-request", and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005332
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005333
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +010053345. Server and default-server options
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01005335------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005336
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01005337The "server" and "default-server" keywords support a certain number of settings
5338which are all passed as arguments on the server line. The order in which those
5339arguments appear does not count, and they are all optional. Some of those
5340settings are single words (booleans) while others expect one or several values
5341after them. In this case, the values must immediately follow the setting name.
5342Except default-server, all those settings must be specified after the server's
5343address if they are used:
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005344
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005345 server <name> <address>[:port] [settings ...]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01005346 default-server [settings ...]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005347
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005348The currently supported settings are the following ones.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005349
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005350addr <ipv4>
5351 Using the "addr" parameter, it becomes possible to use a different IP address
5352 to send health-checks. On some servers, it may be desirable to dedicate an IP
5353 address to specific component able to perform complex tests which are more
5354 suitable to health-checks than the application. This parameter is ignored if
5355 the "check" parameter is not set. See also the "port" parameter.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005356
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005357 Supported in default-server: No
5358
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005359backup
5360 When "backup" is present on a server line, the server is only used in load
5361 balancing when all other non-backup servers are unavailable. Requests coming
5362 with a persistence cookie referencing the server will always be served
5363 though. By default, only the first operational backup server is used, unless
5364 the "allbackups" option is set in the backend. See also the "allbackups"
5365 option.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005366
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005367 Supported in default-server: No
5368
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005369check
5370 This option enables health checks on the server. By default, a server is
5371 always considered available. If "check" is set, the server will receive
5372 periodic health checks to ensure that it is really able to serve requests.
5373 The default address and port to send the tests to are those of the server,
5374 and the default source is the same as the one defined in the backend. It is
5375 possible to change the address using the "addr" parameter, the port using the
5376 "port" parameter, the source address using the "source" address, and the
5377 interval and timers using the "inter", "rise" and "fall" parameters. The
5378 request method is define in the backend using the "httpchk", "smtpchk",
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +01005379 "mysql-check" and "ssl-hello-chk" options. Please refer to those options and
5380 parameters for more information.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005381
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005382 Supported in default-server: No
5383
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005384cookie <value>
5385 The "cookie" parameter sets the cookie value assigned to the server to
5386 <value>. This value will be checked in incoming requests, and the first
5387 operational server possessing the same value will be selected. In return, in
5388 cookie insertion or rewrite modes, this value will be assigned to the cookie
5389 sent to the client. There is nothing wrong in having several servers sharing
5390 the same cookie value, and it is in fact somewhat common between normal and
5391 backup servers. See also the "cookie" keyword in backend section.
5392
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005393 Supported in default-server: No
5394
Willy Tarreau96839092010-03-29 10:02:24 +02005395disabled
5396 The "disabled" keyword starts the server in the "disabled" state. That means
5397 that it is marked down in maintenance mode, and no connection other than the
5398 ones allowed by persist mode will reach it. It is very well suited to setup
5399 new servers, because normal traffic will never reach them, while it is still
5400 possible to test the service by making use of the force-persist mechanism.
5401
5402 Supported in default-server: No
5403
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005404error-limit <count>
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01005405 If health observing is enabled, the "error-limit" parameter specifies the
5406 number of consecutive errors that triggers event selected by the "on-error"
5407 option. By default it is set to 10 consecutive errors.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005408
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005409 Supported in default-server: Yes
5410
5411 See also the "check", "error-limit" and "on-error".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005412
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005413fall <count>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005414 The "fall" parameter states that a server will be considered as dead after
5415 <count> consecutive unsuccessful health checks. This value defaults to 3 if
5416 unspecified. See also the "check", "inter" and "rise" parameters.
5417
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005418 Supported in default-server: Yes
5419
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005420id <value>
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02005421 Set a persistent ID for the server. This ID must be positive and unique for
5422 the proxy. An unused ID will automatically be assigned if unset. The first
5423 assigned value will be 1. This ID is currently only returned in statistics.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005424
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005425 Supported in default-server: No
5426
5427inter <delay>
5428fastinter <delay>
5429downinter <delay>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005430 The "inter" parameter sets the interval between two consecutive health checks
5431 to <delay> milliseconds. If left unspecified, the delay defaults to 2000 ms.
5432 It is also possible to use "fastinter" and "downinter" to optimize delays
5433 between checks depending on the server state :
5434
5435 Server state | Interval used
5436 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5437 UP 100% (non-transitional) | "inter"
5438 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5439 Transitionally UP (going down), |
5440 Transitionally DOWN (going up), | "fastinter" if set, "inter" otherwise.
5441 or yet unchecked. |
5442 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5443 DOWN 100% (non-transitional) | "downinter" if set, "inter" otherwise.
5444 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005445
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005446 Just as with every other time-based parameter, they can be entered in any
5447 other explicit unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }. The "inter" parameter also
5448 serves as a timeout for health checks sent to servers if "timeout check" is
5449 not set. In order to reduce "resonance" effects when multiple servers are
5450 hosted on the same hardware, the health-checks of all servers are started
5451 with a small time offset between them. It is also possible to add some random
5452 noise in the health checks interval using the global "spread-checks"
5453 keyword. This makes sense for instance when a lot of backends use the same
5454 servers.
5455
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005456 Supported in default-server: Yes
5457
5458maxconn <maxconn>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005459 The "maxconn" parameter specifies the maximal number of concurrent
5460 connections that will be sent to this server. If the number of incoming
5461 concurrent requests goes higher than this value, they will be queued, waiting
5462 for a connection to be released. This parameter is very important as it can
5463 save fragile servers from going down under extreme loads. If a "minconn"
5464 parameter is specified, the limit becomes dynamic. The default value is "0"
5465 which means unlimited. See also the "minconn" and "maxqueue" parameters, and
5466 the backend's "fullconn" keyword.
5467
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005468 Supported in default-server: Yes
5469
5470maxqueue <maxqueue>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005471 The "maxqueue" parameter specifies the maximal number of connections which
5472 will wait in the queue for this server. If this limit is reached, next
5473 requests will be redispatched to other servers instead of indefinitely
5474 waiting to be served. This will break persistence but may allow people to
5475 quickly re-log in when the server they try to connect to is dying. The
5476 default value is "0" which means the queue is unlimited. See also the
5477 "maxconn" and "minconn" parameters.
5478
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005479 Supported in default-server: Yes
5480
5481minconn <minconn>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005482 When the "minconn" parameter is set, the maxconn limit becomes a dynamic
5483 limit following the backend's load. The server will always accept at least
5484 <minconn> connections, never more than <maxconn>, and the limit will be on
5485 the ramp between both values when the backend has less than <fullconn>
5486 concurrent connections. This makes it possible to limit the load on the
5487 server during normal loads, but push it further for important loads without
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005488 overloading the server during exceptional loads. See also the "maxconn"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005489 and "maxqueue" parameters, as well as the "fullconn" backend keyword.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005490
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005491 Supported in default-server: Yes
5492
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005493observe <mode>
5494 This option enables health adjusting based on observing communication with
5495 the server. By default this functionality is disabled and enabling it also
5496 requires to enable health checks. There are two supported modes: "layer4" and
5497 "layer7". In layer4 mode, only successful/unsuccessful tcp connections are
5498 significant. In layer7, which is only allowed for http proxies, responses
5499 received from server are verified, like valid/wrong http code, unparsable
5500 headers, a timeout, etc.
5501
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005502 Supported in default-server: No
5503
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005504 See also the "check", "on-error" and "error-limit".
5505
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005506on-error <mode>
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005507 Select what should happen when enough consecutive errors are detected.
5508 Currently, four modes are available:
5509 - fastinter: force fastinter
5510 - fail-check: simulate a failed check, also forces fastinter (default)
5511 - sudden-death: simulate a pre-fatal failed health check, one more failed
5512 check will mark a server down, forces fastinter
5513 - mark-down: mark the server immediately down and force fastinter
5514
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005515 Supported in default-server: Yes
5516
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005517 See also the "check", "observe" and "error-limit".
5518
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005519port <port>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005520 Using the "port" parameter, it becomes possible to use a different port to
5521 send health-checks. On some servers, it may be desirable to dedicate a port
5522 to a specific component able to perform complex tests which are more suitable
5523 to health-checks than the application. It is common to run a simple script in
5524 inetd for instance. This parameter is ignored if the "check" parameter is not
5525 set. See also the "addr" parameter.
5526
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005527 Supported in default-server: Yes
5528
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005529redir <prefix>
5530 The "redir" parameter enables the redirection mode for all GET and HEAD
5531 requests addressing this server. This means that instead of having HAProxy
5532 forward the request to the server, it will send an "HTTP 302" response with
5533 the "Location" header composed of this prefix immediately followed by the
5534 requested URI beginning at the leading '/' of the path component. That means
5535 that no trailing slash should be used after <prefix>. All invalid requests
5536 will be rejected, and all non-GET or HEAD requests will be normally served by
5537 the server. Note that since the response is completely forged, no header
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005538 mangling nor cookie insertion is possible in the response. However, cookies in
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005539 requests are still analysed, making this solution completely usable to direct
5540 users to a remote location in case of local disaster. Main use consists in
5541 increasing bandwidth for static servers by having the clients directly
5542 connect to them. Note: never use a relative location here, it would cause a
5543 loop between the client and HAProxy!
5544
5545 Example : server srv1 192.168.1.1:80 redir http://image1.mydomain.com check
5546
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005547 Supported in default-server: No
5548
5549rise <count>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005550 The "rise" parameter states that a server will be considered as operational
5551 after <count> consecutive successful health checks. This value defaults to 2
5552 if unspecified. See also the "check", "inter" and "fall" parameters.
5553
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005554 Supported in default-server: Yes
5555
5556slowstart <start_time_in_ms>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005557 The "slowstart" parameter for a server accepts a value in milliseconds which
5558 indicates after how long a server which has just come back up will run at
5559 full speed. Just as with every other time-based parameter, it can be entered
5560 in any other explicit unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }. The speed grows
5561 linearly from 0 to 100% during this time. The limitation applies to two
5562 parameters :
5563
5564 - maxconn: the number of connections accepted by the server will grow from 1
5565 to 100% of the usual dynamic limit defined by (minconn,maxconn,fullconn).
5566
5567 - weight: when the backend uses a dynamic weighted algorithm, the weight
5568 grows linearly from 1 to 100%. In this case, the weight is updated at every
5569 health-check. For this reason, it is important that the "inter" parameter
5570 is smaller than the "slowstart", in order to maximize the number of steps.
5571
5572 The slowstart never applies when haproxy starts, otherwise it would cause
5573 trouble to running servers. It only applies when a server has been previously
5574 seen as failed.
5575
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005576 Supported in default-server: Yes
5577
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02005578source <addr>[:<pl>[-<ph>]] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]
5579source <addr>[:<pl>[-<ph>]] [interface <name>] ...
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005580 The "source" parameter sets the source address which will be used when
5581 connecting to the server. It follows the exact same parameters and principle
5582 as the backend "source" keyword, except that it only applies to the server
5583 referencing it. Please consult the "source" keyword for details.
5584
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02005585 Additionally, the "source" statement on a server line allows one to specify a
5586 source port range by indicating the lower and higher bounds delimited by a
5587 dash ('-'). Some operating systems might require a valid IP address when a
5588 source port range is specified. It is permitted to have the same IP/range for
5589 several servers. Doing so makes it possible to bypass the maximum of 64k
5590 total concurrent connections. The limit will then reach 64k connections per
5591 server.
5592
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005593 Supported in default-server: No
5594
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005595track [<proxy>/]<server>
5596 This option enables ability to set the current state of the server by
5597 tracking another one. Only a server with checks enabled can be tracked
5598 so it is not possible for example to track a server that tracks another
5599 one. If <proxy> is omitted the current one is used. If disable-on-404 is
5600 used, it has to be enabled on both proxies.
5601
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005602 Supported in default-server: No
5603
5604weight <weight>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005605 The "weight" parameter is used to adjust the server's weight relative to
5606 other servers. All servers will receive a load proportional to their weight
5607 relative to the sum of all weights, so the higher the weight, the higher the
Willy Tarreau6704d672009-06-15 10:56:05 +02005608 load. The default weight is 1, and the maximal value is 256. A value of 0
5609 means the server will not participate in load-balancing but will still accept
5610 persistent connections. If this parameter is used to distribute the load
5611 according to server's capacity, it is recommended to start with values which
5612 can both grow and shrink, for instance between 10 and 100 to leave enough
5613 room above and below for later adjustments.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005614
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005615 Supported in default-server: Yes
5616
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005617
56186. HTTP header manipulation
5619---------------------------
5620
5621In HTTP mode, it is possible to rewrite, add or delete some of the request and
5622response headers based on regular expressions. It is also possible to block a
5623request or a response if a particular header matches a regular expression,
5624which is enough to stop most elementary protocol attacks, and to protect
5625against information leak from the internal network. But there is a limitation
5626to this : since HAProxy's HTTP engine does not support keep-alive, only headers
5627passed during the first request of a TCP session will be seen. All subsequent
5628headers will be considered data only and not analyzed. Furthermore, HAProxy
5629never touches data contents, it stops analysis at the end of headers.
5630
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +02005631There is an exception though. If HAProxy encounters an "Informational Response"
5632(status code 1xx), it is able to process all rsp* rules which can allow, deny,
5633rewrite or delete a header, but it will refuse to add a header to any such
5634messages as this is not HTTP-compliant. The reason for still processing headers
5635in such responses is to stop and/or fix any possible information leak which may
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005636happen, for instance because another downstream equipment would unconditionally
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +02005637add a header, or if a server name appears there. When such messages are seen,
5638normal processing still occurs on the next non-informational messages.
5639
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005640This section covers common usage of the following keywords, described in detail
5641in section 4.2 :
5642
5643 - reqadd <string>
5644 - reqallow <search>
5645 - reqiallow <search>
5646 - reqdel <search>
5647 - reqidel <search>
5648 - reqdeny <search>
5649 - reqideny <search>
5650 - reqpass <search>
5651 - reqipass <search>
5652 - reqrep <search> <replace>
5653 - reqirep <search> <replace>
5654 - reqtarpit <search>
5655 - reqitarpit <search>
5656 - rspadd <string>
5657 - rspdel <search>
5658 - rspidel <search>
5659 - rspdeny <search>
5660 - rspideny <search>
5661 - rsprep <search> <replace>
5662 - rspirep <search> <replace>
5663
5664With all these keywords, the same conventions are used. The <search> parameter
5665is a POSIX extended regular expression (regex) which supports grouping through
5666parenthesis (without the backslash). Spaces and other delimiters must be
5667prefixed with a backslash ('\') to avoid confusion with a field delimiter.
5668Other characters may be prefixed with a backslash to change their meaning :
5669
5670 \t for a tab
5671 \r for a carriage return (CR)
5672 \n for a new line (LF)
5673 \ to mark a space and differentiate it from a delimiter
5674 \# to mark a sharp and differentiate it from a comment
5675 \\ to use a backslash in a regex
5676 \\\\ to use a backslash in the text (*2 for regex, *2 for haproxy)
5677 \xXX to write the ASCII hex code XX as in the C language
5678
5679The <replace> parameter contains the string to be used to replace the largest
5680portion of text matching the regex. It can make use of the special characters
5681above, and can reference a substring which is delimited by parenthesis in the
5682regex, by writing a backslash ('\') immediately followed by one digit from 0 to
56839 indicating the group position (0 designating the entire line). This practice
5684is very common to users of the "sed" program.
5685
5686The <string> parameter represents the string which will systematically be added
5687after the last header line. It can also use special character sequences above.
5688
5689Notes related to these keywords :
5690---------------------------------
5691 - these keywords are not always convenient to allow/deny based on header
5692 contents. It is strongly recommended to use ACLs with the "block" keyword
5693 instead, resulting in far more flexible and manageable rules.
5694
5695 - lines are always considered as a whole. It is not possible to reference
5696 a header name only or a value only. This is important because of the way
5697 headers are written (notably the number of spaces after the colon).
5698
5699 - the first line is always considered as a header, which makes it possible to
5700 rewrite or filter HTTP requests URIs or response codes, but in turn makes
5701 it harder to distinguish between headers and request line. The regex prefix
5702 ^[^\ \t]*[\ \t] matches any HTTP method followed by a space, and the prefix
5703 ^[^ \t:]*: matches any header name followed by a colon.
5704
5705 - for performances reasons, the number of characters added to a request or to
5706 a response is limited at build time to values between 1 and 4 kB. This
5707 should normally be far more than enough for most usages. If it is too short
5708 on occasional usages, it is possible to gain some space by removing some
5709 useless headers before adding new ones.
5710
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005711 - keywords beginning with "reqi" and "rspi" are the same as their counterpart
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005712 without the 'i' letter except that they ignore case when matching patterns.
5713
5714 - when a request passes through a frontend then a backend, all req* rules
5715 from the frontend will be evaluated, then all req* rules from the backend
5716 will be evaluated. The reverse path is applied to responses.
5717
5718 - req* statements are applied after "block" statements, so that "block" is
5719 always the first one, but before "use_backend" in order to permit rewriting
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005720 before switching.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005721
5722
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +010057237. Using ACLs and pattern extraction
5724------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005725
5726The use of Access Control Lists (ACL) provides a flexible solution to perform
5727content switching and generally to take decisions based on content extracted
5728from the request, the response or any environmental status. The principle is
5729simple :
5730
5731 - define test criteria with sets of values
5732 - perform actions only if a set of tests is valid
5733
5734The actions generally consist in blocking the request, or selecting a backend.
5735
5736In order to define a test, the "acl" keyword is used. The syntax is :
5737
5738 acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...
5739
5740This creates a new ACL <aclname> or completes an existing one with new tests.
5741Those tests apply to the portion of request/response specified in <criterion>
5742and may be adjusted with optional flags [flags]. Some criteria also support
5743an operator which may be specified before the set of values. The values are
5744of the type supported by the criterion, and are separated by spaces.
5745
5746ACL names must be formed from upper and lower case letters, digits, '-' (dash),
5747'_' (underscore) , '.' (dot) and ':' (colon). ACL names are case-sensitive,
5748which means that "my_acl" and "My_Acl" are two different ACLs.
5749
5750There is no enforced limit to the number of ACLs. The unused ones do not affect
5751performance, they just consume a small amount of memory.
5752
5753The following ACL flags are currently supported :
5754
5755 -i : ignore case during matching.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005756 -- : force end of flags. Useful when a string looks like one of the flags.
5757
5758Supported types of values are :
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005759
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005760 - integers or integer ranges
5761 - strings
5762 - regular expressions
5763 - IP addresses and networks
5764
5765
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020057667.1. Matching integers
5767----------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005768
5769Matching integers is special in that ranges and operators are permitted. Note
5770that integer matching only applies to positive values. A range is a value
5771expressed with a lower and an upper bound separated with a colon, both of which
5772may be omitted.
5773
5774For instance, "1024:65535" is a valid range to represent a range of
5775unprivileged ports, and "1024:" would also work. "0:1023" is a valid
5776representation of privileged ports, and ":1023" would also work.
5777
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005778As a special case, some ACL functions support decimal numbers which are in fact
5779two integers separated by a dot. This is used with some version checks for
5780instance. All integer properties apply to those decimal numbers, including
5781ranges and operators.
5782
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005783For an easier usage, comparison operators are also supported. Note that using
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005784operators with ranges does not make much sense and is strongly discouraged.
5785Similarly, it does not make much sense to perform order comparisons with a set
5786of values.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005787
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005788Available operators for integer matching are :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005789
5790 eq : true if the tested value equals at least one value
5791 ge : true if the tested value is greater than or equal to at least one value
5792 gt : true if the tested value is greater than at least one value
5793 le : true if the tested value is less than or equal to at least one value
5794 lt : true if the tested value is less than at least one value
5795
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005796For instance, the following ACL matches any negative Content-Length header :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005797
5798 acl negative-length hdr_val(content-length) lt 0
5799
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005800This one matches SSL versions between 3.0 and 3.1 (inclusive) :
5801
5802 acl sslv3 req_ssl_ver 3:3.1
5803
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005804
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020058057.2. Matching strings
5806---------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005807
5808String matching applies to verbatim strings as they are passed, with the
5809exception of the backslash ("\") which makes it possible to escape some
5810characters such as the space. If the "-i" flag is passed before the first
5811string, then the matching will be performed ignoring the case. In order
5812to match the string "-i", either set it second, or pass the "--" flag
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005813before the first string. Same applies of course to match the string "--".
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005814
5815
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020058167.3. Matching regular expressions (regexes)
5817-------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005818
5819Just like with string matching, regex matching applies to verbatim strings as
5820they are passed, with the exception of the backslash ("\") which makes it
5821possible to escape some characters such as the space. If the "-i" flag is
5822passed before the first regex, then the matching will be performed ignoring
5823the case. In order to match the string "-i", either set it second, or pass
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005824the "--" flag before the first string. Same principle applies of course to
5825match the string "--".
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005826
5827
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020058287.4. Matching IPv4 addresses
5829----------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005830
5831IPv4 addresses values can be specified either as plain addresses or with a
5832netmask appended, in which case the IPv4 address matches whenever it is
5833within the network. Plain addresses may also be replaced with a resolvable
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005834host name, but this practice is generally discouraged as it makes it more
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005835difficult to read and debug configurations. If hostnames are used, you should
5836at least ensure that they are present in /etc/hosts so that the configuration
5837does not depend on any random DNS match at the moment the configuration is
5838parsed.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005839
5840
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020058417.5. Available matching criteria
5842--------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005843
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020058447.5.1. Matching at Layer 4 and below
5845------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005846
5847A first set of criteria applies to information which does not require any
5848analysis of the request or response contents. Those generally include TCP/IP
5849addresses and ports, as well as internal values independant on the stream.
5850
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005851always_false
5852 This one never matches. All values and flags are ignored. It may be used as
5853 a temporary replacement for another one when adjusting configurations.
5854
5855always_true
5856 This one always matches. All values and flags are ignored. It may be used as
5857 a temporary replacement for another one when adjusting configurations.
5858
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01005859avg_queue <integer>
5860avg_queue(frontend) <integer>
5861 Returns the total number of queued connections of the designated backend
5862 divided by the number of active servers. This is very similar to "queue"
5863 except that the size of the farm is considered, in order to give a more
5864 accurate measurement of the time it may take for a new connection to be
5865 processed. The main usage is to return a sorry page to new users when it
5866 becomes certain they will get a degraded service. Note that in the event
5867 there would not be any active server anymore, we would consider twice the
5868 number of queued connections as the measured value. This is a fair estimate,
5869 as we expect one server to get back soon anyway, but we still prefer to send
5870 new traffic to another backend if in better shape. See also the "queue",
5871 "be_conn", and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki346f76d2010-01-12 21:59:30 +01005872
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005873be_conn <integer>
5874be_conn(frontend) <integer>
5875 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the backend,
5876 possibly including the connection being evaluated. If no backend name is
5877 specified, the current one is used. But it is also possible to check another
5878 backend. It can be used to use a specific farm when the nominal one is full.
5879 See also the "fe_conn", "queue" and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005880
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01005881be_sess_rate <integer>
5882be_sess_rate(backend) <integer>
5883 Returns true when the sessions creation rate on the backend matches the
5884 specified values or ranges, in number of new sessions per second. This is
5885 used to switch to an alternate backend when an expensive or fragile one
5886 reaches too high a session rate, or to limit abuse of service (eg. prevent
5887 sucking of an online dictionary).
5888
5889 Example :
5890 # Redirect to an error page if the dictionary is requested too often
5891 backend dynamic
5892 mode http
5893 acl being_scanned be_sess_rate gt 100
5894 redirect location /denied.html if being_scanned
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005895
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005896connslots <integer>
5897connslots(backend) <integer>
5898 The basic idea here is to be able to measure the number of connection "slots"
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005899 still available (connection + queue), so that anything beyond that (intended
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005900 usage; see "use_backend" keyword) can be redirected to a different backend.
5901
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005902 'connslots' = number of available server connection slots, + number of
5903 available server queue slots.
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005904
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005905 Note that while "fe_conn" may be used, "connslots" comes in especially
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005906 useful when you have a case of traffic going to one single ip, splitting into
5907 multiple backends (perhaps using acls to do name-based load balancing) and
5908 you want to be able to differentiate between different backends, and their
5909 available "connslots". Also, whereas "nbsrv" only measures servers that are
5910 actually *down*, this acl is more fine-grained and looks into the number of
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005911 available connection slots as well. See also "queue" and "avg_queue".
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005912
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005913 OTHER CAVEATS AND NOTES: at this point in time, the code does not take care
5914 of dynamic connections. Also, if any of the server maxconn, or maxqueue is 0,
5915 then this acl clearly does not make sense, in which case the value returned
5916 will be -1.
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005917
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01005918dst <ip_address>
5919 Applies to the local IPv4 address the client connected to. It can be used to
5920 switch to a different backend for some alternative addresses.
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005921
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01005922dst_conn <integer>
5923 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the same socket
5924 including the one being evaluated. It can be used to either return a sorry
5925 page before hard-blocking, or to use a specific backend to drain new requests
5926 when the socket is considered saturated. This offers the ability to assign
5927 different limits to different listening ports or addresses. See also the
5928 "fe_conn" and "be_conn" criteria.
5929
5930dst_port <integer>
5931 Applies to the local port the client connected to. It can be used to switch
5932 to a different backend for some alternative ports.
5933
5934fe_conn <integer>
5935fe_conn(frontend) <integer>
5936 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the frontend,
5937 possibly including the connection being evaluated. If no frontend name is
5938 specified, the current one is used. But it is also possible to check another
5939 frontend. It can be used to either return a sorry page before hard-blocking,
5940 or to use a specific backend to drain new requests when the farm is
5941 considered saturated. See also the "dst_conn", "be_conn" and "fe_sess_rate"
5942 criteria.
5943
5944fe_id <integer>
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01005945 Applies to the frontend's id. Can be used in backends to check from which
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01005946 frontend it was called.
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005947
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01005948fe_sess_rate <integer>
5949fe_sess_rate(frontend) <integer>
5950 Returns true when the session creation rate on the current or the named
5951 frontend matches the specified values or ranges, expressed in new sessions
5952 per second. This is used to limit the connection rate to acceptable ranges in
5953 order to prevent abuse of service at the earliest moment. This can be
5954 combined with layer 4 ACLs in order to force the clients to wait a bit for
5955 the rate to go down below the limit.
5956
5957 Example :
5958 # This frontend limits incoming mails to 10/s with a max of 100
5959 # concurrent connections. We accept any connection below 10/s, and
5960 # force excess clients to wait for 100 ms. Since clients are limited to
5961 # 100 max, there cannot be more than 10 incoming mails per second.
5962 frontend mail
5963 bind :25
5964 mode tcp
5965 maxconn 100
5966 acl too_fast fe_sess_rate ge 10
5967 tcp-request inspect-delay 100ms
5968 tcp-request content accept if ! too_fast
5969 tcp-request content accept if WAIT_END
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005970
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01005971nbsrv <integer>
5972nbsrv(backend) <integer>
5973 Returns true when the number of usable servers of either the current backend
5974 or the named backend matches the values or ranges specified. This is used to
5975 switch to an alternate backend when the number of servers is too low to
5976 to handle some load. It is useful to report a failure when combined with
5977 "monitor fail".
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01005978
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01005979queue <integer>
5980queue(frontend) <integer>
5981 Returns the total number of queued connections of the designated backend,
5982 including all the connections in server queues. If no backend name is
5983 specified, the current one is used, but it is also possible to check another
5984 one. This can be used to take actions when queuing goes above a known level,
5985 generally indicating a surge of traffic or a massive slowdown on the servers.
5986 One possible action could be to reject new users but still accept old ones.
5987 See also the "avg_queue", "be_conn", and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
5988
5989so_id <integer>
5990 Applies to the socket's id. Useful in frontends with many bind keywords.
5991
5992src <ip_address>
5993 Applies to the client's IPv4 address. It is usually used to limit access to
5994 certain resources such as statistics. Note that it is the TCP-level source
5995 address which is used, and not the address of a client behind a proxy.
5996
5997src_port <integer>
5998 Applies to the client's TCP source port. This has a very limited usage.
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01005999
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006000
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020060017.5.2. Matching contents at Layer 4
6002-----------------------------------
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006003
6004A second set of criteria depends on data found in buffers, but which can change
6005during analysis. This requires that some data has been buffered, for instance
6006through TCP request content inspection. Please see the "tcp-request" keyword
6007for more detailed information on the subject.
6008
6009req_len <integer>
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02006010 Returns true when the length of the data in the request buffer matches the
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006011 specified range. It is important to understand that this test does not
6012 return false as long as the buffer is changing. This means that a check with
6013 equality to zero will almost always immediately match at the beginning of the
6014 session, while a test for more data will wait for that data to come in and
6015 return false only when haproxy is certain that no more data will come in.
6016 This test was designed to be used with TCP request content inspection.
6017
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02006018req_proto_http
6019 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like HTTP and correctly
6020 parses as such. It is the same parser as the common HTTP request parser which
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006021 is used so there should be no surprises. This test can be used for instance
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02006022 to direct HTTP traffic to a given port and HTTPS traffic to another one
6023 using TCP request content inspection rules.
6024
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02006025req_rdp_cookie <string>
6026req_rdp_cookie(name) <string>
6027 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like the RDP protocol, and
6028 a cookie is present and equal to <string>. By default, any cookie name is
6029 checked, but a specific cookie name can be specified in parenthesis. The
6030 parser only checks for the first cookie, as illustrated in the RDP protocol
6031 specification. The cookie name is case insensitive. This ACL can be useful
6032 with the "MSTS" cookie, as it can contain the user name of the client
6033 connecting to the server if properly configured on the client. This can be
6034 used to restrict access to certain servers to certain users.
6035
6036req_rdp_cookie_cnt <integer>
6037req_rdp_cookie_cnt(name) <integer>
6038 Returns true when the data in the request buffer look like the RDP protocol
6039 and the number of RDP cookies matches the specified range (typically zero or
6040 one). Optionally a specific cookie name can be checked. This is a simple way
6041 of detecting the RDP protocol, as clients generally send the MSTS or MSTSHASH
6042 cookies.
6043
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006044req_ssl_ver <decimal>
6045 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like SSL, with a protocol
6046 version matching the specified range. Both SSLv2 hello messages and SSLv3
6047 messages are supported. The test tries to be strict enough to avoid being
6048 easily fooled. In particular, it waits for as many bytes as announced in the
6049 message header if this header looks valid (bound to the buffer size). Note
6050 that TLSv1 is announced as SSL version 3.1. This test was designed to be used
6051 with TCP request content inspection.
6052
Willy Tarreaub6fb4202008-07-20 11:18:28 +02006053wait_end
6054 Waits for the end of the analysis period to return true. This may be used in
6055 conjunction with content analysis to avoid returning a wrong verdict early.
6056 It may also be used to delay some actions, such as a delayed reject for some
6057 special addresses. Since it either stops the rules evaluation or immediately
6058 returns true, it is recommended to use this acl as the last one in a rule.
6059 Please note that the default ACL "WAIT_END" is always usable without prior
6060 declaration. This test was designed to be used with TCP request content
6061 inspection.
6062
6063 Examples :
6064 # delay every incoming request by 2 seconds
6065 tcp-request inspect-delay 2s
6066 tcp-request content accept if WAIT_END
6067
6068 # don't immediately tell bad guys they are rejected
6069 tcp-request inspect-delay 10s
6070 acl goodguys src 10.0.0.0/24
6071 acl badguys src 10.0.1.0/24
6072 tcp-request content accept if goodguys
6073 tcp-request content reject if badguys WAIT_END
6074 tcp-request content reject
6075
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006076
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020060777.5.3. Matching at Layer 7
6078--------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006079
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006080A third set of criteria applies to information which can be found at the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006081application layer (layer 7). Those require that a full HTTP request has been
6082read, and are only evaluated then. They may require slightly more CPU resources
6083than the layer 4 ones, but not much since the request and response are indexed.
6084
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006085hdr <string>
6086hdr(header) <string>
6087 Note: all the "hdr*" matching criteria either apply to all headers, or to a
6088 particular header whose name is passed between parenthesis and without any
6089 space. The header name is not case-sensitive. The header matching complies
6090 with RFC2616, and treats as separate headers all values delimited by commas.
6091 Use the shdr() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6092
6093 The "hdr" criteria returns true if any of the headers matching the criteria
6094 match any of the strings. This can be used to check exact for values. For
6095 instance, checking that "connection: close" is set :
6096
6097 hdr(Connection) -i close
6098
6099hdr_beg <string>
6100hdr_beg(header) <string>
6101 Returns true when one of the headers begins with one of the strings. See
6102 "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_beg() variant for
6103 response headers sent by the server.
6104
6105hdr_cnt <integer>
6106hdr_cnt(header) <integer>
6107 Returns true when the number of occurrence of the specified header matches
6108 the values or ranges specified. It is important to remember that one header
6109 line may count as several headers if it has several values. This is used to
6110 detect presence, absence or abuse of a specific header, as well as to block
6111 request smuggling attacks by rejecting requests which contain more than one
6112 of certain headers. See "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use
6113 the shdr_cnt() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6114
6115hdr_dir <string>
6116hdr_dir(header) <string>
6117 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings either
6118 isolated or delimited by slashes. This is used to perform filename or
6119 directory name matching, and may be used with Referer. See "hdr" for more
6120 information on header matching. Use the shdr_dir() variant for response
6121 headers sent by the server.
6122
6123hdr_dom <string>
6124hdr_dom(header) <string>
6125 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings either
6126 isolated or delimited by dots. This is used to perform domain name matching,
6127 and may be used with the Host header. See "hdr" for more information on
6128 header matching. Use the shdr_dom() variant for response headers sent by the
6129 server.
6130
6131hdr_end <string>
6132hdr_end(header) <string>
6133 Returns true when one of the headers ends with one of the strings. See "hdr"
6134 for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_end() variant for
6135 response headers sent by the server.
6136
6137hdr_ip <ip_address>
6138hdr_ip(header) <ip_address>
6139 Returns true when one of the headers' values contains an IP address matching
6140 <ip_address>. This is mainly used with headers such as X-Forwarded-For or
6141 X-Client-IP. See "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the
6142 shdr_ip() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6143
6144hdr_reg <regex>
6145hdr_reg(header) <regex>
6146 Returns true when one of the headers matches of the regular expressions. It
6147 can be used at any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching
6148 is slower than other methods. See also other "hdr_" criteria, as well as
6149 "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_reg() variant for
6150 response headers sent by the server.
6151
6152hdr_sub <string>
6153hdr_sub(header) <string>
6154 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings. See "hdr"
6155 for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_sub() variant for
6156 response headers sent by the server.
6157
6158hdr_val <integer>
6159hdr_val(header) <integer>
6160 Returns true when one of the headers starts with a number which matches the
6161 values or ranges specified. This may be used to limit content-length to
6162 acceptable values for example. See "hdr" for more information on header
6163 matching. Use the shdr_val() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6164
6165http_auth(userlist)
6166http_auth_group(userlist) <group> [<group>]*
6167 Returns true when authentication data received from the client matches
6168 username & password stored on the userlist. It is also possible to
6169 use http_auth_group to check if the user is assigned to at least one
6170 of specified groups.
6171
6172 Currently only http basic auth is supported.
6173
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006174method <string>
6175 Applies to the method in the HTTP request, eg: "GET". Some predefined ACL
6176 already check for most common methods.
6177
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006178path <string>
6179 Returns true when the path part of the request, which starts at the first
6180 slash and ends before the question mark, equals one of the strings. It may be
6181 used to match known files, such as /favicon.ico.
6182
6183path_beg <string>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006184 Returns true when the path begins with one of the strings. This can be used
6185 to send certain directory names to alternative backends.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006186
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006187path_dir <string>
6188 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with
6189 slashes in the path. This is used to perform filename or directory name
6190 matching without the risk of wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also
6191 "url_dir" and "path_sub".
6192
6193path_dom <string>
6194 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
6195 in the path. This may be used to perform domain name matching in proxy
6196 requests. See also "path_sub" and "url_dom".
6197
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006198path_end <string>
6199 Returns true when the path ends with one of the strings. This may be used to
6200 control file name extension.
6201
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006202path_reg <regex>
6203 Returns true when the path matches one of the regular expressions. It can be
6204 used any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching is slower
6205 than other methods. See also "url_reg" and all "path_" criteria.
6206
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006207path_sub <string>
6208 Returns true when the path contains one of the strings. It can be used to
6209 detect particular patterns in paths, such as "../" for example. See also
6210 "path_dir".
6211
6212req_ver <string>
6213 Applies to the version string in the HTTP request, eg: "1.0". Some predefined
6214 ACL already check for versions 1.0 and 1.1.
6215
6216status <integer>
6217 Applies to the HTTP status code in the HTTP response, eg: "302". It can be
6218 used to act on responses depending on status ranges, for instance, remove
6219 any Location header if the response is not a 3xx.
6220
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006221url <string>
6222 Applies to the whole URL passed in the request. The only real use is to match
6223 "*", for which there already is a predefined ACL.
6224
6225url_beg <string>
6226 Returns true when the URL begins with one of the strings. This can be used to
6227 check whether a URL begins with a slash or with a protocol scheme.
6228
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006229url_dir <string>
6230 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with
6231 slashes in the URL. This is used to perform filename or directory name
6232 matching without the risk of wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also
6233 "path_dir" and "url_sub".
6234
6235url_dom <string>
6236 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
6237 in the URL. This is used to perform domain name matching without the risk of
6238 wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also "url_sub".
6239
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006240url_end <string>
6241 Returns true when the URL ends with one of the strings. It has very limited
6242 use. "path_end" should be used instead for filename matching.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006243
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006244url_ip <ip_address>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006245 Applies to the IP address specified in the absolute URI in an HTTP request.
6246 It can be used to prevent access to certain resources such as local network.
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006247 It is useful with option "http_proxy".
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006248
6249url_port <integer>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006250 Applies to the port specified in the absolute URI in an HTTP request. It can
6251 be used to prevent access to certain resources. It is useful with option
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006252 "http_proxy". Note that if the port is not specified in the request, port 80
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006253 is assumed.
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006254
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006255url_reg <regex>
6256 Returns true when the URL matches one of the regular expressions. It can be
6257 used any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching is slower
6258 than other methods. See also "path_reg" and all "url_" criteria.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01006259
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006260url_sub <string>
6261 Returns true when the URL contains one of the strings. It can be used to
6262 detect particular patterns in query strings for example. See also "path_sub".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01006263
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006264
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020062657.6. Pre-defined ACLs
6266---------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006267
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006268Some predefined ACLs are hard-coded so that they do not have to be declared in
6269every frontend which needs them. They all have their names in upper case in
6270order to avoid confusion. Their equivalence is provided below. Please note that
6271only the first three ones are not layer 7 based.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006272
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006273ACL name Equivalent to Usage
6274---------------+-----------------------------+---------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006275FALSE always_false never match
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02006276HTTP req_proto_http match if protocol is valid HTTP
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006277HTTP_1.0 req_ver 1.0 match HTTP version 1.0
6278HTTP_1.1 req_ver 1.1 match HTTP version 1.1
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006279HTTP_CONTENT hdr_val(content-length) gt 0 match an existing content-length
6280HTTP_URL_ABS url_reg ^[^/:]*:// match absolute URL with scheme
6281HTTP_URL_SLASH url_beg / match URL beginning with "/"
6282HTTP_URL_STAR url * match URL equal to "*"
6283LOCALHOST src 127.0.0.1/8 match connection from local host
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006284METH_CONNECT method CONNECT match HTTP CONNECT method
6285METH_GET method GET HEAD match HTTP GET or HEAD method
6286METH_HEAD method HEAD match HTTP HEAD method
6287METH_OPTIONS method OPTIONS match HTTP OPTIONS method
6288METH_POST method POST match HTTP POST method
6289METH_TRACE method TRACE match HTTP TRACE method
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02006290RDP_COOKIE req_rdp_cookie_cnt gt 0 match presence of an RDP cookie
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006291REQ_CONTENT req_len gt 0 match data in the request buffer
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006292TRUE always_true always match
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006293WAIT_END wait_end wait for end of content analysis
6294---------------+-----------------------------+---------------------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006295
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006296
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020062977.7. Using ACLs to form conditions
6298----------------------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006299
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006300Some actions are only performed upon a valid condition. A condition is a
6301combination of ACLs with operators. 3 operators are supported :
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006302
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006303 - AND (implicit)
6304 - OR (explicit with the "or" keyword or the "||" operator)
6305 - Negation with the exclamation mark ("!")
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006306
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006307A condition is formed as a disjunctive form:
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006308
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006309 [!]acl1 [!]acl2 ... [!]acln { or [!]acl1 [!]acl2 ... [!]acln } ...
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006310
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006311Such conditions are generally used after an "if" or "unless" statement,
6312indicating when the condition will trigger the action.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006313
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006314For instance, to block HTTP requests to the "*" URL with methods other than
6315"OPTIONS", as well as POST requests without content-length, and GET or HEAD
6316requests with a content-length greater than 0, and finally every request which
6317is not either GET/HEAD/POST/OPTIONS !
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006318
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006319 acl missing_cl hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0
6320 block if HTTP_URL_STAR !METH_OPTIONS || METH_POST missing_cl
6321 block if METH_GET HTTP_CONTENT
6322 block unless METH_GET or METH_POST or METH_OPTIONS
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006323
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006324To select a different backend for requests to static contents on the "www" site
6325and to every request on the "img", "video", "download" and "ftp" hosts :
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006326
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006327 acl url_static path_beg /static /images /img /css
6328 acl url_static path_end .gif .png .jpg .css .js
6329 acl host_www hdr_beg(host) -i www
6330 acl host_static hdr_beg(host) -i img. video. download. ftp.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006331
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006332 # now use backend "static" for all static-only hosts, and for static urls
6333 # of host "www". Use backend "www" for the rest.
6334 use_backend static if host_static or host_www url_static
6335 use_backend www if host_www
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006336
Willy Tarreau95fa4692010-02-01 13:05:50 +01006337It is also possible to form rules using "anonymous ACLs". Those are unnamed ACL
6338expressions that are built on the fly without needing to be declared. They must
6339be enclosed between braces, with a space before and after each brace (because
6340the braces must be seen as independant words). Example :
6341
6342 The following rule :
6343
6344 acl missing_cl hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0
6345 block if METH_POST missing_cl
6346
6347 Can also be written that way :
6348
6349 block if METH_POST { hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0 }
6350
6351It is generally not recommended to use this construct because it's a lot easier
6352to leave errors in the configuration when written that way. However, for very
6353simple rules matching only one source IP address for instance, it can make more
6354sense to use them than to declare ACLs with random names. Another example of
6355good use is the following :
6356
6357 With named ACLs :
6358
6359 acl site_dead nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2
6360 acl site_dead nbsrv(static) lt 2
6361 monitor fail if site_dead
6362
6363 With anonymous ACLs :
6364
6365 monitor fail if { nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2 } || { nbsrv(static) lt 2 }
6366
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006367See section 4.2 for detailed help on the "block" and "use_backend" keywords.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006368
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01006369
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +010063707.8. Pattern extraction
6371-----------------------
6372
6373The stickiness features relies on pattern extraction in the request and
6374response. Sometimes the data needs to be converted first before being stored,
6375for instance converted from ASCII to IP or upper case to lower case.
6376
6377All these operations of data extraction and conversion are defined as
6378"pattern extraction rules". A pattern rule always has the same format. It
6379begins with a single pattern fetch word, potentially followed by a list of
6380arguments within parenthesis then an optional list of transformations. As
6381much as possible, the pattern fetch functions use the same name as their
6382equivalent used in ACLs.
6383
6384The list of currently supported pattern fetch functions is the following :
6385
6386 src This is the source IPv4 address of the client of the session.
6387 It is of type IP and only works with such tables.
6388
6389 dst This is the destination IPv4 address of the session on the
6390 client side, which is the address the client connected to.
6391 It can be useful when running in transparent mode. It is of
6392 typie IP and only works with such tables.
6393
6394 dst_port This is the destination TCP port of the session on the client
6395 side, which is the port the client connected to. This might be
6396 used when running in transparent mode or when assigning dynamic
6397 ports to some clients for a whole application session. It is of
6398 type integer and only works with such tables.
6399
6400
6401The currently available list of transformations include :
6402
6403 lower Convert a string pattern to lower case. This can only be placed
6404 after a string pattern fetch function or after a conversion
6405 function returning a string type. The result is of type string.
6406
6407 upper Convert a string pattern to upper case. This can only be placed
6408 after a string pattern fetch function or after a conversion
6409 function returning a string type. The result is of type string.
6410
Willy Tarreaud31d6eb2010-01-26 18:01:41 +01006411 ipmask(mask) Apply a mask to an IPv4 address, and use the result for lookups
6412 and storage. This can be used to make all hosts within a
6413 certain mask to share the same table entries and as such use
6414 the same server. The mask can be passed in dotted form (eg:
6415 255.255.255.0) or in CIDR form (eg: 24).
6416
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01006417
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020064188. Logging
6419----------
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01006420
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006421One of HAProxy's strong points certainly lies is its precise logs. It probably
6422provides the finest level of information available for such a product, which is
6423very important for troubleshooting complex environments. Standard information
6424provided in logs include client ports, TCP/HTTP state timers, precise session
6425state at termination and precise termination cause, information about decisions
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006426to direct traffic to a server, and of course the ability to capture arbitrary
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006427headers.
6428
6429In order to improve administrators reactivity, it offers a great transparency
6430about encountered problems, both internal and external, and it is possible to
6431send logs to different sources at the same time with different level filters :
6432
6433 - global process-level logs (system errors, start/stop, etc..)
6434 - per-instance system and internal errors (lack of resource, bugs, ...)
6435 - per-instance external troubles (servers up/down, max connections)
6436 - per-instance activity (client connections), either at the establishment or
6437 at the termination.
6438
6439The ability to distribute different levels of logs to different log servers
6440allow several production teams to interact and to fix their problems as soon
6441as possible. For example, the system team might monitor system-wide errors,
6442while the application team might be monitoring the up/down for their servers in
6443real time, and the security team might analyze the activity logs with one hour
6444delay.
6445
6446
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020064478.1. Log levels
6448---------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006449
6450TCP and HTTP connections can be logged with informations such as date, time,
6451source IP address, destination address, connection duration, response times,
6452HTTP request, the HTTP return code, number of bytes transmitted, the conditions
6453in which the session ended, and even exchanged cookies values, to track a
6454particular user's problems for example. All messages are sent to up to two
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006455syslog servers. Check the "log" keyword in section 4.2 for more info about log
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006456facilities.
6457
6458
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020064598.2. Log formats
6460----------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006461
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02006462HAProxy supports 4 log formats. Several fields are common between these formats
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006463and will be detailed in the next sections. A few of them may slightly vary with
6464the configuration, due to indicators specific to certain options. The supported
6465formats are the following ones :
6466
6467 - the default format, which is very basic and very rarely used. It only
6468 provides very basic information about the incoming connection at the moment
6469 it is accepted : source IP:port, destination IP:port, and frontend-name.
6470 This mode will eventually disappear so it will not be described to great
6471 extents.
6472
6473 - the TCP format, which is more advanced. This format is enabled when "option
6474 tcplog" is set on the frontend. HAProxy will then usually wait for the
6475 connection to terminate before logging. This format provides much richer
6476 information, such as timers, connection counts, queue size, etc... This
6477 format is recommended for pure TCP proxies.
6478
6479 - the HTTP format, which is the most advanced for HTTP proxying. This format
6480 is enabled when "option httplog" is set on the frontend. It provides the
6481 same information as the TCP format with some HTTP-specific fields such as
6482 the request, the status code, and captures of headers and cookies. This
6483 format is recommended for HTTP proxies.
6484
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02006485 - the CLF HTTP format, which is equivalent to the HTTP format, but with the
6486 fields arranged in the same order as the CLF format. In this mode, all
6487 timers, captures, flags, etc... appear one per field after the end of the
6488 common fields, in the same order they appear in the standard HTTP format.
6489
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006490Next sections will go deeper into details for each of these formats. Format
6491specification will be performed on a "field" basis. Unless stated otherwise, a
6492field is a portion of text delimited by any number of spaces. Since syslog
6493servers are susceptible of inserting fields at the beginning of a line, it is
6494always assumed that the first field is the one containing the process name and
6495identifier.
6496
6497Note : Since log lines may be quite long, the log examples in sections below
6498 might be broken into multiple lines. The example log lines will be
6499 prefixed with 3 closing angle brackets ('>>>') and each time a log is
6500 broken into multiple lines, each non-final line will end with a
6501 backslash ('\') and the next line will start indented by two characters.
6502
6503
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020065048.2.1. Default log format
6505-------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006506
6507This format is used when no specific option is set. The log is emitted as soon
6508as the connection is accepted. One should note that this currently is the only
6509format which logs the request's destination IP and ports.
6510
6511 Example :
6512 listen www
6513 mode http
6514 log global
6515 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6516
6517 >>> Feb 6 12:12:09 localhost \
6518 haproxy[14385]: Connect from 10.0.1.2:33312 to 10.0.3.31:8012 \
6519 (www/HTTP)
6520
6521 Field Format Extract from the example above
6522 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14385]:
6523 2 'Connect from' Connect from
6524 3 source_ip ':' source_port 10.0.1.2:33312
6525 4 'to' to
6526 5 destination_ip ':' destination_port 10.0.3.31:8012
6527 6 '(' frontend_name '/' mode ')' (www/HTTP)
6528
6529Detailed fields description :
6530 - "source_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the connection.
6531 - "source_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6532 - "destination_ip" is the IP address the client connected to.
6533 - "destination_port" is the TCP port the client connected to.
6534 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6535 and processed the connection.
6536 - "mode is the mode the frontend is operating (TCP or HTTP).
6537
6538It is advised not to use this deprecated format for newer installations as it
6539will eventually disappear.
6540
6541
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020065428.2.2. TCP log format
6543---------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006544
6545The TCP format is used when "option tcplog" is specified in the frontend, and
6546is the recommended format for pure TCP proxies. It provides a lot of precious
6547information for troubleshooting. Since this format includes timers and byte
6548counts, the log is normally emitted at the end of the session. It can be
6549emitted earlier if "option logasap" is specified, which makes sense in most
6550environments with long sessions such as remote terminals. Sessions which match
6551the "monitor" rules are never logged. It is also possible not to emit logs for
6552sessions for which no data were exchanged between the client and the server, by
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006553specifying "option dontlognull" in the frontend. Successful connections will
6554not be logged if "option dontlog-normal" is specified in the frontend. A few
6555fields may slightly vary depending on some configuration options, those are
6556marked with a star ('*') after the field name below.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006557
6558 Example :
6559 frontend fnt
6560 mode tcp
6561 option tcplog
6562 log global
6563 default_backend bck
6564
6565 backend bck
6566 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6567
6568 >>> Feb 6 12:12:56 localhost \
6569 haproxy[14387]: 10.0.1.2:33313 [06/Feb/2009:12:12:51.443] fnt \
6570 bck/srv1 0/0/5007 212 -- 0/0/0/0/3 0/0
6571
6572 Field Format Extract from the example above
6573 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14387]:
6574 2 client_ip ':' client_port 10.0.1.2:33313
6575 3 '[' accept_date ']' [06/Feb/2009:12:12:51.443]
6576 4 frontend_name fnt
6577 5 backend_name '/' server_name bck/srv1
6578 6 Tw '/' Tc '/' Tt* 0/0/5007
6579 7 bytes_read* 212
6580 8 termination_state --
6581 9 actconn '/' feconn '/' beconn '/' srv_conn '/' retries* 0/0/0/0/3
6582 10 srv_queue '/' backend_queue 0/0
6583
6584Detailed fields description :
6585 - "client_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the TCP
6586 connection to haproxy.
6587
6588 - "client_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6589
6590 - "accept_date" is the exact date when the connection was received by haproxy
6591 (which might be very slightly different from the date observed on the
6592 network if there was some queuing in the system's backlog). This is usually
6593 the same date which may appear in any upstream firewall's log.
6594
6595 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6596 and processed the connection.
6597
6598 - "backend_name" is the name of the backend (or listener) which was selected
6599 to manage the connection to the server. This will be the same as the
6600 frontend if no switching rule has been applied, which is common for TCP
6601 applications.
6602
6603 - "server_name" is the name of the last server to which the connection was
6604 sent, which might differ from the first one if there were connection errors
6605 and a redispatch occurred. Note that this server belongs to the backend
6606 which processed the request. If the connection was aborted before reaching
6607 a server, "<NOSRV>" is indicated instead of a server name.
6608
6609 - "Tw" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting in the various queues.
6610 It can be "-1" if the connection was aborted before reaching the queue.
6611 See "Timers" below for more details.
6612
6613 - "Tc" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the connection to
6614 establish to the final server, including retries. It can be "-1" if the
6615 connection was aborted before a connection could be established. See
6616 "Timers" below for more details.
6617
6618 - "Tt" is the total time in milliseconds elapsed between the accept and the
6619 last close. It covers all possible processings. There is one exception, if
6620 "option logasap" was specified, then the time counting stops at the moment
6621 the log is emitted. In this case, a '+' sign is prepended before the value,
6622 indicating that the final one will be larger. See "Timers" below for more
6623 details.
6624
6625 - "bytes_read" is the total number of bytes transmitted from the server to
6626 the client when the log is emitted. If "option logasap" is specified, the
6627 this value will be prefixed with a '+' sign indicating that the final one
6628 may be larger. Please note that this value is a 64-bit counter, so log
6629 analysis tools must be able to handle it without overflowing.
6630
6631 - "termination_state" is the condition the session was in when the session
6632 ended. This indicates the session state, which side caused the end of
6633 session to happen, and for what reason (timeout, error, ...). The normal
6634 flags should be "--", indicating the session was closed by either end with
6635 no data remaining in buffers. See below "Session state at disconnection"
6636 for more details.
6637
6638 - "actconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the process when
6639 the session was logged. It it useful to detect when some per-process system
6640 limits have been reached. For instance, if actconn is close to 512 when
6641 multiple connection errors occur, chances are high that the system limits
6642 the process to use a maximum of 1024 file descriptors and that all of them
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006643 are used. See section 3 "Global parameters" to find how to tune the system.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006644
6645 - "feconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the frontend when
6646 the session was logged. It is useful to estimate the amount of resource
6647 required to sustain high loads, and to detect when the frontend's "maxconn"
6648 has been reached. Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is
6649 because there is congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be
6650 caused by a denial of service attack.
6651
6652 - "beconn" is the total number of concurrent connections handled by the
6653 backend when the session was logged. It includes the total number of
6654 concurrent connections active on servers as well as the number of
6655 connections pending in queues. It is useful to estimate the amount of
6656 additional servers needed to support high loads for a given application.
6657 Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is because there is
6658 congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be caused by a
6659 denial of service attack.
6660
6661 - "srv_conn" is the total number of concurrent connections still active on
6662 the server when the session was logged. It can never exceed the server's
6663 configured "maxconn" parameter. If this value is very often close or equal
6664 to the server's "maxconn", it means that traffic regulation is involved a
6665 lot, meaning that either the server's maxconn value is too low, or that
6666 there aren't enough servers to process the load with an optimal response
6667 time. When only one of the server's "srv_conn" is high, it usually means
6668 that this server has some trouble causing the connections to take longer to
6669 be processed than on other servers.
6670
6671 - "retries" is the number of connection retries experienced by this session
6672 when trying to connect to the server. It must normally be zero, unless a
6673 server is being stopped at the same moment the connection was attempted.
6674 Frequent retries generally indicate either a network problem between
6675 haproxy and the server, or a misconfigured system backlog on the server
6676 preventing new connections from being queued. This field may optionally be
6677 prefixed with a '+' sign, indicating that the session has experienced a
6678 redispatch after the maximal retry count has been reached on the initial
6679 server. In this case, the server name appearing in the log is the one the
6680 connection was redispatched to, and not the first one, though both may
6681 sometimes be the same in case of hashing for instance. So as a general rule
6682 of thumb, when a '+' is present in front of the retry count, this count
6683 should not be attributed to the logged server.
6684
6685 - "srv_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6686 this one in the server queue. It is zero when the request has not gone
6687 through the server queue. It makes it possible to estimate the approximate
6688 server's response time by dividing the time spent in queue by the number of
6689 requests in the queue. It is worth noting that if a session experiences a
6690 redispatch and passes through two server queues, their positions will be
6691 cumulated. A request should not pass through both the server queue and the
6692 backend queue unless a redispatch occurs.
6693
6694 - "backend_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6695 this one in the backend's global queue. It is zero when the request has not
6696 gone through the global queue. It makes it possible to estimate the average
6697 queue length, which easily translates into a number of missing servers when
6698 divided by a server's "maxconn" parameter. It is worth noting that if a
6699 session experiences a redispatch, it may pass twice in the backend's queue,
6700 and then both positions will be cumulated. A request should not pass
6701 through both the server queue and the backend queue unless a redispatch
6702 occurs.
6703
6704
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020067058.2.3. HTTP log format
6706----------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006707
6708The HTTP format is the most complete and the best suited for HTTP proxies. It
6709is enabled by when "option httplog" is specified in the frontend. It provides
6710the same level of information as the TCP format with additional features which
6711are specific to the HTTP protocol. Just like the TCP format, the log is usually
6712emitted at the end of the session, unless "option logasap" is specified, which
6713generally only makes sense for download sites. A session which matches the
6714"monitor" rules will never logged. It is also possible not to log sessions for
6715which no data were sent by the client by specifying "option dontlognull" in the
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006716frontend. Successful connections will not be logged if "option dontlog-normal"
6717is specified in the frontend.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006718
6719Most fields are shared with the TCP log, some being different. A few fields may
6720slightly vary depending on some configuration options. Those ones are marked
6721with a star ('*') after the field name below.
6722
6723 Example :
6724 frontend http-in
6725 mode http
6726 option httplog
6727 log global
6728 default_backend bck
6729
6730 backend static
6731 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6732
6733 >>> Feb 6 12:14:14 localhost \
6734 haproxy[14389]: 10.0.1.2:33317 [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655] http-in \
6735 static/srv1 10/0/30/69/109 200 2750 - - ---- 1/1/1/1/0 0/0 {1wt.eu} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006736 {} "GET /index.html HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006737
6738 Field Format Extract from the example above
6739 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14389]:
6740 2 client_ip ':' client_port 10.0.1.2:33317
6741 3 '[' accept_date ']' [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655]
6742 4 frontend_name http-in
6743 5 backend_name '/' server_name static/srv1
6744 6 Tq '/' Tw '/' Tc '/' Tr '/' Tt* 10/0/30/69/109
6745 7 status_code 200
6746 8 bytes_read* 2750
6747 9 captured_request_cookie -
6748 10 captured_response_cookie -
6749 11 termination_state ----
6750 12 actconn '/' feconn '/' beconn '/' srv_conn '/' retries* 1/1/1/1/0
6751 13 srv_queue '/' backend_queue 0/0
6752 14 '{' captured_request_headers* '}' {haproxy.1wt.eu}
6753 15 '{' captured_response_headers* '}' {}
6754 16 '"' http_request '"' "GET /index.html HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006755
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006756
6757Detailed fields description :
6758 - "client_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the TCP
6759 connection to haproxy.
6760
6761 - "client_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6762
6763 - "accept_date" is the exact date when the TCP connection was received by
6764 haproxy (which might be very slightly different from the date observed on
6765 the network if there was some queuing in the system's backlog). This is
6766 usually the same date which may appear in any upstream firewall's log. This
6767 does not depend on the fact that the client has sent the request or not.
6768
6769 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6770 and processed the connection.
6771
6772 - "backend_name" is the name of the backend (or listener) which was selected
6773 to manage the connection to the server. This will be the same as the
6774 frontend if no switching rule has been applied.
6775
6776 - "server_name" is the name of the last server to which the connection was
6777 sent, which might differ from the first one if there were connection errors
6778 and a redispatch occurred. Note that this server belongs to the backend
6779 which processed the request. If the request was aborted before reaching a
6780 server, "<NOSRV>" is indicated instead of a server name. If the request was
6781 intercepted by the stats subsystem, "<STATS>" is indicated instead.
6782
6783 - "Tq" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the client to send
6784 a full HTTP request, not counting data. It can be "-1" if the connection
6785 was aborted before a complete request could be received. It should always
6786 be very small because a request generally fits in one single packet. Large
6787 times here generally indicate network trouble between the client and
6788 haproxy. See "Timers" below for more details.
6789
6790 - "Tw" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting in the various queues.
6791 It can be "-1" if the connection was aborted before reaching the queue.
6792 See "Timers" below for more details.
6793
6794 - "Tc" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the connection to
6795 establish to the final server, including retries. It can be "-1" if the
6796 request was aborted before a connection could be established. See "Timers"
6797 below for more details.
6798
6799 - "Tr" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the server to send
6800 a full HTTP response, not counting data. It can be "-1" if the request was
6801 aborted before a complete response could be received. It generally matches
6802 the server's processing time for the request, though it may be altered by
6803 the amount of data sent by the client to the server. Large times here on
6804 "GET" requests generally indicate an overloaded server. See "Timers" below
6805 for more details.
6806
6807 - "Tt" is the total time in milliseconds elapsed between the accept and the
6808 last close. It covers all possible processings. There is one exception, if
6809 "option logasap" was specified, then the time counting stops at the moment
6810 the log is emitted. In this case, a '+' sign is prepended before the value,
6811 indicating that the final one will be larger. See "Timers" below for more
6812 details.
6813
6814 - "status_code" is the HTTP status code returned to the client. This status
6815 is generally set by the server, but it might also be set by haproxy when
6816 the server cannot be reached or when its response is blocked by haproxy.
6817
6818 - "bytes_read" is the total number of bytes transmitted to the client when
6819 the log is emitted. This does include HTTP headers. If "option logasap" is
6820 specified, the this value will be prefixed with a '+' sign indicating that
6821 the final one may be larger. Please note that this value is a 64-bit
6822 counter, so log analysis tools must be able to handle it without
6823 overflowing.
6824
6825 - "captured_request_cookie" is an optional "name=value" entry indicating that
6826 the client had this cookie in the request. The cookie name and its maximum
6827 length are defined by the "capture cookie" statement in the frontend
6828 configuration. The field is a single dash ('-') when the option is not
6829 set. Only one cookie may be captured, it is generally used to track session
6830 ID exchanges between a client and a server to detect session crossing
6831 between clients due to application bugs. For more details, please consult
6832 the section "Capturing HTTP headers and cookies" below.
6833
6834 - "captured_response_cookie" is an optional "name=value" entry indicating
6835 that the server has returned a cookie with its response. The cookie name
6836 and its maximum length are defined by the "capture cookie" statement in the
6837 frontend configuration. The field is a single dash ('-') when the option is
6838 not set. Only one cookie may be captured, it is generally used to track
6839 session ID exchanges between a client and a server to detect session
6840 crossing between clients due to application bugs. For more details, please
6841 consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers and cookies" below.
6842
6843 - "termination_state" is the condition the session was in when the session
6844 ended. This indicates the session state, which side caused the end of
6845 session to happen, for what reason (timeout, error, ...), just like in TCP
6846 logs, and information about persistence operations on cookies in the last
6847 two characters. The normal flags should begin with "--", indicating the
6848 session was closed by either end with no data remaining in buffers. See
6849 below "Session state at disconnection" for more details.
6850
6851 - "actconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the process when
6852 the session was logged. It it useful to detect when some per-process system
6853 limits have been reached. For instance, if actconn is close to 512 or 1024
6854 when multiple connection errors occur, chances are high that the system
6855 limits the process to use a maximum of 1024 file descriptors and that all
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006856 of them are used. See section 3 "Global parameters" to find how to tune the
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006857 system.
6858
6859 - "feconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the frontend when
6860 the session was logged. It is useful to estimate the amount of resource
6861 required to sustain high loads, and to detect when the frontend's "maxconn"
6862 has been reached. Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is
6863 because there is congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be
6864 caused by a denial of service attack.
6865
6866 - "beconn" is the total number of concurrent connections handled by the
6867 backend when the session was logged. It includes the total number of
6868 concurrent connections active on servers as well as the number of
6869 connections pending in queues. It is useful to estimate the amount of
6870 additional servers needed to support high loads for a given application.
6871 Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is because there is
6872 congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be caused by a
6873 denial of service attack.
6874
6875 - "srv_conn" is the total number of concurrent connections still active on
6876 the server when the session was logged. It can never exceed the server's
6877 configured "maxconn" parameter. If this value is very often close or equal
6878 to the server's "maxconn", it means that traffic regulation is involved a
6879 lot, meaning that either the server's maxconn value is too low, or that
6880 there aren't enough servers to process the load with an optimal response
6881 time. When only one of the server's "srv_conn" is high, it usually means
6882 that this server has some trouble causing the requests to take longer to be
6883 processed than on other servers.
6884
6885 - "retries" is the number of connection retries experienced by this session
6886 when trying to connect to the server. It must normally be zero, unless a
6887 server is being stopped at the same moment the connection was attempted.
6888 Frequent retries generally indicate either a network problem between
6889 haproxy and the server, or a misconfigured system backlog on the server
6890 preventing new connections from being queued. This field may optionally be
6891 prefixed with a '+' sign, indicating that the session has experienced a
6892 redispatch after the maximal retry count has been reached on the initial
6893 server. In this case, the server name appearing in the log is the one the
6894 connection was redispatched to, and not the first one, though both may
6895 sometimes be the same in case of hashing for instance. So as a general rule
6896 of thumb, when a '+' is present in front of the retry count, this count
6897 should not be attributed to the logged server.
6898
6899 - "srv_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6900 this one in the server queue. It is zero when the request has not gone
6901 through the server queue. It makes it possible to estimate the approximate
6902 server's response time by dividing the time spent in queue by the number of
6903 requests in the queue. It is worth noting that if a session experiences a
6904 redispatch and passes through two server queues, their positions will be
6905 cumulated. A request should not pass through both the server queue and the
6906 backend queue unless a redispatch occurs.
6907
6908 - "backend_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6909 this one in the backend's global queue. It is zero when the request has not
6910 gone through the global queue. It makes it possible to estimate the average
6911 queue length, which easily translates into a number of missing servers when
6912 divided by a server's "maxconn" parameter. It is worth noting that if a
6913 session experiences a redispatch, it may pass twice in the backend's queue,
6914 and then both positions will be cumulated. A request should not pass
6915 through both the server queue and the backend queue unless a redispatch
6916 occurs.
6917
6918 - "captured_request_headers" is a list of headers captured in the request due
6919 to the presence of the "capture request header" statement in the frontend.
6920 Multiple headers can be captured, they will be delimited by a vertical bar
6921 ('|'). When no capture is enabled, the braces do not appear, causing a
6922 shift of remaining fields. It is important to note that this field may
6923 contain spaces, and that using it requires a smarter log parser than when
6924 it's not used. Please consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers and
6925 cookies" below for more details.
6926
6927 - "captured_response_headers" is a list of headers captured in the response
6928 due to the presence of the "capture response header" statement in the
6929 frontend. Multiple headers can be captured, they will be delimited by a
6930 vertical bar ('|'). When no capture is enabled, the braces do not appear,
6931 causing a shift of remaining fields. It is important to note that this
6932 field may contain spaces, and that using it requires a smarter log parser
6933 than when it's not used. Please consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers
6934 and cookies" below for more details.
6935
6936 - "http_request" is the complete HTTP request line, including the method,
6937 request and HTTP version string. Non-printable characters are encoded (see
6938 below the section "Non-printable characters"). This is always the last
6939 field, and it is always delimited by quotes and is the only one which can
6940 contain quotes. If new fields are added to the log format, they will be
6941 added before this field. This field might be truncated if the request is
6942 huge and does not fit in the standard syslog buffer (1024 characters). This
6943 is the reason why this field must always remain the last one.
6944
6945
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069468.3. Advanced logging options
6947-----------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006948
6949Some advanced logging options are often looked for but are not easy to find out
6950just by looking at the various options. Here is an entry point for the few
6951options which can enable better logging. Please refer to the keywords reference
6952for more information about their usage.
6953
6954
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069558.3.1. Disabling logging of external tests
6956------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006957
6958It is quite common to have some monitoring tools perform health checks on
6959haproxy. Sometimes it will be a layer 3 load-balancer such as LVS or any
6960commercial load-balancer, and sometimes it will simply be a more complete
6961monitoring system such as Nagios. When the tests are very frequent, users often
6962ask how to disable logging for those checks. There are three possibilities :
6963
6964 - if connections come from everywhere and are just TCP probes, it is often
6965 desired to simply disable logging of connections without data exchange, by
6966 setting "option dontlognull" in the frontend. It also disables logging of
6967 port scans, which may or may not be desired.
6968
6969 - if the connection come from a known source network, use "monitor-net" to
6970 declare this network as monitoring only. Any host in this network will then
6971 only be able to perform health checks, and their requests will not be
6972 logged. This is generally appropriate to designate a list of equipments
6973 such as other load-balancers.
6974
6975 - if the tests are performed on a known URI, use "monitor-uri" to declare
6976 this URI as dedicated to monitoring. Any host sending this request will
6977 only get the result of a health-check, and the request will not be logged.
6978
6979
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069808.3.2. Logging before waiting for the session to terminate
6981----------------------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006982
6983The problem with logging at end of connection is that you have no clue about
6984what is happening during very long sessions, such as remote terminal sessions
6985or large file downloads. This problem can be worked around by specifying
6986"option logasap" in the frontend. Haproxy will then log as soon as possible,
6987just before data transfer begins. This means that in case of TCP, it will still
6988log the connection status to the server, and in case of HTTP, it will log just
6989after processing the server headers. In this case, the number of bytes reported
6990is the number of header bytes sent to the client. In order to avoid confusion
6991with normal logs, the total time field and the number of bytes are prefixed
6992with a '+' sign which means that real numbers are certainly larger.
6993
6994
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069958.3.3. Raising log level upon errors
6996------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006997
6998Sometimes it is more convenient to separate normal traffic from errors logs,
6999for instance in order to ease error monitoring from log files. When the option
7000"log-separate-errors" is used, connections which experience errors, timeouts,
7001retries, redispatches or HTTP status codes 5xx will see their syslog level
7002raised from "info" to "err". This will help a syslog daemon store the log in
7003a separate file. It is very important to keep the errors in the normal traffic
7004file too, so that log ordering is not altered. You should also be careful if
7005you already have configured your syslog daemon to store all logs higher than
7006"notice" in an "admin" file, because the "err" level is higher than "notice".
7007
7008
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020070098.3.4. Disabling logging of successful connections
7010--------------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02007011
7012Although this may sound strange at first, some large sites have to deal with
7013multiple thousands of logs per second and are experiencing difficulties keeping
7014them intact for a long time or detecting errors within them. If the option
7015"dontlog-normal" is set on the frontend, all normal connections will not be
7016logged. In this regard, a normal connection is defined as one without any
7017error, timeout, retry nor redispatch. In HTTP, the status code is checked too,
7018and a response with a status 5xx is not considered normal and will be logged
7019too. Of course, doing is is really discouraged as it will remove most of the
7020useful information from the logs. Do this only if you have no other
7021alternative.
7022
7023
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020070248.4. Timing events
7025------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007026
7027Timers provide a great help in troubleshooting network problems. All values are
7028reported in milliseconds (ms). These timers should be used in conjunction with
7029the session termination flags. In TCP mode with "option tcplog" set on the
7030frontend, 3 control points are reported under the form "Tw/Tc/Tt", and in HTTP
7031mode, 5 control points are reported under the form "Tq/Tw/Tc/Tr/Tt" :
7032
7033 - Tq: total time to get the client request (HTTP mode only). It's the time
7034 elapsed between the moment the client connection was accepted and the
7035 moment the proxy received the last HTTP header. The value "-1" indicates
7036 that the end of headers (empty line) has never been seen. This happens when
7037 the client closes prematurely or times out.
7038
7039 - Tw: total time spent in the queues waiting for a connection slot. It
7040 accounts for backend queue as well as the server queues, and depends on the
7041 queue size, and the time needed for the server to complete previous
7042 requests. The value "-1" means that the request was killed before reaching
7043 the queue, which is generally what happens with invalid or denied requests.
7044
7045 - Tc: total time to establish the TCP connection to the server. It's the time
7046 elapsed between the moment the proxy sent the connection request, and the
7047 moment it was acknowledged by the server, or between the TCP SYN packet and
7048 the matching SYN/ACK packet in return. The value "-1" means that the
7049 connection never established.
7050
7051 - Tr: server response time (HTTP mode only). It's the time elapsed between
7052 the moment the TCP connection was established to the server and the moment
7053 the server sent its complete response headers. It purely shows its request
7054 processing time, without the network overhead due to the data transmission.
7055 It is worth noting that when the client has data to send to the server, for
7056 instance during a POST request, the time already runs, and this can distort
7057 apparent response time. For this reason, it's generally wise not to trust
7058 too much this field for POST requests initiated from clients behind an
7059 untrusted network. A value of "-1" here means that the last the response
7060 header (empty line) was never seen, most likely because the server timeout
7061 stroke before the server managed to process the request.
7062
7063 - Tt: total session duration time, between the moment the proxy accepted it
7064 and the moment both ends were closed. The exception is when the "logasap"
7065 option is specified. In this case, it only equals (Tq+Tw+Tc+Tr), and is
7066 prefixed with a '+' sign. From this field, we can deduce "Td", the data
7067 transmission time, by substracting other timers when valid :
7068
7069 Td = Tt - (Tq + Tw + Tc + Tr)
7070
7071 Timers with "-1" values have to be excluded from this equation. In TCP
7072 mode, "Tq" and "Tr" have to be excluded too. Note that "Tt" can never be
7073 negative.
7074
7075These timers provide precious indications on trouble causes. Since the TCP
7076protocol defines retransmit delays of 3, 6, 12... seconds, we know for sure
7077that timers close to multiples of 3s are nearly always related to lost packets
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007078due to network problems (wires, negotiation, congestion). Moreover, if "Tt" is
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007079close to a timeout value specified in the configuration, it often means that a
7080session has been aborted on timeout.
7081
7082Most common cases :
7083
7084 - If "Tq" is close to 3000, a packet has probably been lost between the
7085 client and the proxy. This is very rare on local networks but might happen
7086 when clients are on far remote networks and send large requests. It may
7087 happen that values larger than usual appear here without any network cause.
7088 Sometimes, during an attack or just after a resource starvation has ended,
7089 haproxy may accept thousands of connections in a few milliseconds. The time
7090 spent accepting these connections will inevitably slightly delay processing
7091 of other connections, and it can happen that request times in the order of
7092 a few tens of milliseconds are measured after a few thousands of new
7093 connections have been accepted at once.
7094
7095 - If "Tc" is close to 3000, a packet has probably been lost between the
7096 server and the proxy during the server connection phase. This value should
7097 always be very low, such as 1 ms on local networks and less than a few tens
7098 of ms on remote networks.
7099
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02007100 - If "Tr" is nearly always lower than 3000 except some rare values which seem
7101 to be the average majored by 3000, there are probably some packets lost
7102 between the proxy and the server.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007103
7104 - If "Tt" is large even for small byte counts, it generally is because
7105 neither the client nor the server decides to close the connection, for
7106 instance because both have agreed on a keep-alive connection mode. In order
7107 to solve this issue, it will be needed to specify "option httpclose" on
7108 either the frontend or the backend. If the problem persists, it means that
7109 the server ignores the "close" connection mode and expects the client to
7110 close. Then it will be required to use "option forceclose". Having the
7111 smallest possible 'Tt' is important when connection regulation is used with
7112 the "maxconn" option on the servers, since no new connection will be sent
7113 to the server until another one is released.
7114
7115Other noticeable HTTP log cases ('xx' means any value to be ignored) :
7116
7117 Tq/Tw/Tc/Tr/+Tt The "option logasap" is present on the frontend and the log
7118 was emitted before the data phase. All the timers are valid
7119 except "Tt" which is shorter than reality.
7120
7121 -1/xx/xx/xx/Tt The client was not able to send a complete request in time
7122 or it aborted too early. Check the session termination flags
7123 then "timeout http-request" and "timeout client" settings.
7124
7125 Tq/-1/xx/xx/Tt It was not possible to process the request, maybe because
7126 servers were out of order, because the request was invalid
7127 or forbidden by ACL rules. Check the session termination
7128 flags.
7129
7130 Tq/Tw/-1/xx/Tt The connection could not establish on the server. Either it
7131 actively refused it or it timed out after Tt-(Tq+Tw) ms.
7132 Check the session termination flags, then check the
7133 "timeout connect" setting. Note that the tarpit action might
7134 return similar-looking patterns, with "Tw" equal to the time
7135 the client connection was maintained open.
7136
7137 Tq/Tw/Tc/-1/Tt The server has accepted the connection but did not return
7138 a complete response in time, or it closed its connexion
7139 unexpectedly after Tt-(Tq+Tw+Tc) ms. Check the session
7140 termination flags, then check the "timeout server" setting.
7141
7142
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020071438.5. Session state at disconnection
7144-----------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007145
7146TCP and HTTP logs provide a session termination indicator in the
7147"termination_state" field, just before the number of active connections. It is
71482-characters long in TCP mode, and is extended to 4 characters in HTTP mode,
7149each of which has a special meaning :
7150
7151 - On the first character, a code reporting the first event which caused the
7152 session to terminate :
7153
7154 C : the TCP session was unexpectedly aborted by the client.
7155
7156 S : the TCP session was unexpectedly aborted by the server, or the
7157 server explicitly refused it.
7158
7159 P : the session was prematurely aborted by the proxy, because of a
7160 connection limit enforcement, because a DENY filter was matched,
7161 because of a security check which detected and blocked a dangerous
7162 error in server response which might have caused information leak
7163 (eg: cacheable cookie), or because the response was processed by
7164 the proxy (redirect, stats, etc...).
7165
7166 R : a resource on the proxy has been exhausted (memory, sockets, source
7167 ports, ...). Usually, this appears during the connection phase, and
7168 system logs should contain a copy of the precise error. If this
7169 happens, it must be considered as a very serious anomaly which
7170 should be fixed as soon as possible by any means.
7171
7172 I : an internal error was identified by the proxy during a self-check.
7173 This should NEVER happen, and you are encouraged to report any log
7174 containing this, because this would almost certainly be a bug. It
7175 would be wise to preventively restart the process after such an
7176 event too, in case it would be caused by memory corruption.
7177
7178 c : the client-side timeout expired while waiting for the client to
7179 send or receive data.
7180
7181 s : the server-side timeout expired while waiting for the server to
7182 send or receive data.
7183
7184 - : normal session completion, both the client and the server closed
7185 with nothing left in the buffers.
7186
7187 - on the second character, the TCP or HTTP session state when it was closed :
7188
7189 R : th proxy was waiting for a complete, valid REQUEST from the client
7190 (HTTP mode only). Nothing was sent to any server.
7191
7192 Q : the proxy was waiting in the QUEUE for a connection slot. This can
7193 only happen when servers have a 'maxconn' parameter set. It can
7194 also happen in the global queue after a redispatch consecutive to
7195 a failed attempt to connect to a dying server. If no redispatch is
7196 reported, then no connection attempt was made to any server.
7197
7198 C : the proxy was waiting for the CONNECTION to establish on the
7199 server. The server might at most have noticed a connection attempt.
7200
7201 H : the proxy was waiting for complete, valid response HEADERS from the
7202 server (HTTP only).
7203
7204 D : the session was in the DATA phase.
7205
7206 L : the proxy was still transmitting LAST data to the client while the
7207 server had already finished. This one is very rare as it can only
7208 happen when the client dies while receiving the last packets.
7209
7210 T : the request was tarpitted. It has been held open with the client
7211 during the whole "timeout tarpit" duration or until the client
7212 closed, both of which will be reported in the "Tw" timer.
7213
7214 - : normal session completion after end of data transfer.
7215
7216 - the third character tells whether the persistence cookie was provided by
7217 the client (only in HTTP mode) :
7218
7219 N : the client provided NO cookie. This is usually the case for new
7220 visitors, so counting the number of occurrences of this flag in the
7221 logs generally indicate a valid trend for the site frequentation.
7222
7223 I : the client provided an INVALID cookie matching no known server.
7224 This might be caused by a recent configuration change, mixed
7225 cookies between HTTP/HTTPS sites, or an attack.
7226
7227 D : the client provided a cookie designating a server which was DOWN,
7228 so either "option persist" was used and the client was sent to
7229 this server, or it was not set and the client was redispatched to
7230 another server.
7231
7232 V : the client provided a valid cookie, and was sent to the associated
7233 server.
7234
7235 - : does not apply (no cookie set in configuration).
7236
7237 - the last character reports what operations were performed on the persistence
7238 cookie returned by the server (only in HTTP mode) :
7239
7240 N : NO cookie was provided by the server, and none was inserted either.
7241
7242 I : no cookie was provided by the server, and the proxy INSERTED one.
7243 Note that in "cookie insert" mode, if the server provides a cookie,
7244 it will still be overwritten and reported as "I" here.
7245
7246 P : a cookie was PROVIDED by the server and transmitted as-is.
7247
7248 R : the cookie provided by the server was REWRITTEN by the proxy, which
7249 happens in "cookie rewrite" or "cookie prefix" modes.
7250
7251 D : the cookie provided by the server was DELETED by the proxy.
7252
7253 - : does not apply (no cookie set in configuration).
7254
7255The combination of the two first flags give a lot of information about what was
7256happening when the session terminated, and why it did terminate. It can be
7257helpful to detect server saturation, network troubles, local system resource
7258starvation, attacks, etc...
7259
7260The most common termination flags combinations are indicated below. They are
7261alphabetically sorted, with the lowercase set just after the upper case for
7262easier finding and understanding.
7263
7264 Flags Reason
7265
7266 -- Normal termination.
7267
7268 CC The client aborted before the connection could be established to the
7269 server. This can happen when haproxy tries to connect to a recently
7270 dead (or unchecked) server, and the client aborts while haproxy is
7271 waiting for the server to respond or for "timeout connect" to expire.
7272
7273 CD The client unexpectedly aborted during data transfer. This can be
7274 caused by a browser crash, by an intermediate equipment between the
7275 client and haproxy which decided to actively break the connection,
7276 by network routing issues between the client and haproxy, or by a
7277 keep-alive session between the server and the client terminated first
7278 by the client.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007279
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007280 cD The client did not send nor acknowledge any data for as long as the
7281 "timeout client" delay. This is often caused by network failures on
7282 the client side, or the client simply leaving the net uncleanly.
7283
7284 CH The client aborted while waiting for the server to start responding.
7285 It might be the server taking too long to respond or the client
7286 clicking the 'Stop' button too fast.
7287
7288 cH The "timeout client" stroke while waiting for client data during a
7289 POST request. This is sometimes caused by too large TCP MSS values
7290 for PPPoE networks which cannot transport full-sized packets. It can
7291 also happen when client timeout is smaller than server timeout and
7292 the server takes too long to respond.
7293
7294 CQ The client aborted while its session was queued, waiting for a server
7295 with enough empty slots to accept it. It might be that either all the
7296 servers were saturated or that the assigned server was taking too
7297 long a time to respond.
7298
7299 CR The client aborted before sending a full HTTP request. Most likely
7300 the request was typed by hand using a telnet client, and aborted
7301 too early. The HTTP status code is likely a 400 here. Sometimes this
7302 might also be caused by an IDS killing the connection between haproxy
7303 and the client.
7304
7305 cR The "timeout http-request" stroke before the client sent a full HTTP
7306 request. This is sometimes caused by too large TCP MSS values on the
7307 client side for PPPoE networks which cannot transport full-sized
7308 packets, or by clients sending requests by hand and not typing fast
7309 enough, or forgetting to enter the empty line at the end of the
7310 request. The HTTP status code is likely a 408 here.
7311
7312 CT The client aborted while its session was tarpitted. It is important to
7313 check if this happens on valid requests, in order to be sure that no
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02007314 wrong tarpit rules have been written. If a lot of them happen, it
7315 might make sense to lower the "timeout tarpit" value to something
7316 closer to the average reported "Tw" timer, in order not to consume
7317 resources for just a few attackers.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007318
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007319 SC The server or an equipment between it and haproxy explicitly refused
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007320 the TCP connection (the proxy received a TCP RST or an ICMP message
7321 in return). Under some circumstances, it can also be the network
7322 stack telling the proxy that the server is unreachable (eg: no route,
7323 or no ARP response on local network). When this happens in HTTP mode,
7324 the status code is likely a 502 or 503 here.
7325
7326 sC The "timeout connect" stroke before a connection to the server could
7327 complete. When this happens in HTTP mode, the status code is likely a
7328 503 or 504 here.
7329
7330 SD The connection to the server died with an error during the data
7331 transfer. This usually means that haproxy has received an RST from
7332 the server or an ICMP message from an intermediate equipment while
7333 exchanging data with the server. This can be caused by a server crash
7334 or by a network issue on an intermediate equipment.
7335
7336 sD The server did not send nor acknowledge any data for as long as the
7337 "timeout server" setting during the data phase. This is often caused
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007338 by too short timeouts on L4 equipments before the server (firewalls,
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007339 load-balancers, ...), as well as keep-alive sessions maintained
7340 between the client and the server expiring first on haproxy.
7341
7342 SH The server aborted before sending its full HTTP response headers, or
7343 it crashed while processing the request. Since a server aborting at
7344 this moment is very rare, it would be wise to inspect its logs to
7345 control whether it crashed and why. The logged request may indicate a
7346 small set of faulty requests, demonstrating bugs in the application.
7347 Sometimes this might also be caused by an IDS killing the connection
7348 between haproxy and the server.
7349
7350 sH The "timeout server" stroke before the server could return its
7351 response headers. This is the most common anomaly, indicating too
7352 long transactions, probably caused by server or database saturation.
7353 The immediate workaround consists in increasing the "timeout server"
7354 setting, but it is important to keep in mind that the user experience
7355 will suffer from these long response times. The only long term
7356 solution is to fix the application.
7357
7358 sQ The session spent too much time in queue and has been expired. See
7359 the "timeout queue" and "timeout connect" settings to find out how to
7360 fix this if it happens too often. If it often happens massively in
7361 short periods, it may indicate general problems on the affected
7362 servers due to I/O or database congestion, or saturation caused by
7363 external attacks.
7364
7365 PC The proxy refused to establish a connection to the server because the
7366 process' socket limit has been reached while attempting to connect.
7367 The global "maxconn" parameter may be increased in the configuration
7368 so that it does not happen anymore. This status is very rare and
7369 might happen when the global "ulimit-n" parameter is forced by hand.
7370
7371 PH The proxy blocked the server's response, because it was invalid,
7372 incomplete, dangerous (cache control), or matched a security filter.
7373 In any case, an HTTP 502 error is sent to the client. One possible
7374 cause for this error is an invalid syntax in an HTTP header name
7375 containing unauthorized characters.
7376
7377 PR The proxy blocked the client's HTTP request, either because of an
7378 invalid HTTP syntax, in which case it returned an HTTP 400 error to
7379 the client, or because a deny filter matched, in which case it
7380 returned an HTTP 403 error.
7381
7382 PT The proxy blocked the client's request and has tarpitted its
7383 connection before returning it a 500 server error. Nothing was sent
7384 to the server. The connection was maintained open for as long as
7385 reported by the "Tw" timer field.
7386
7387 RC A local resource has been exhausted (memory, sockets, source ports)
7388 preventing the connection to the server from establishing. The error
7389 logs will tell precisely what was missing. This is very rare and can
7390 only be solved by proper system tuning.
7391
7392
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020073938.6. Non-printable characters
7394-----------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007395
7396In order not to cause trouble to log analysis tools or terminals during log
7397consulting, non-printable characters are not sent as-is into log files, but are
7398converted to the two-digits hexadecimal representation of their ASCII code,
7399prefixed by the character '#'. The only characters that can be logged without
7400being escaped are comprised between 32 and 126 (inclusive). Obviously, the
7401escape character '#' itself is also encoded to avoid any ambiguity ("#23"). It
7402is the same for the character '"' which becomes "#22", as well as '{', '|' and
7403'}' when logging headers.
7404
7405Note that the space character (' ') is not encoded in headers, which can cause
7406issues for tools relying on space count to locate fields. A typical header
7407containing spaces is "User-Agent".
7408
7409Last, it has been observed that some syslog daemons such as syslog-ng escape
7410the quote ('"') with a backslash ('\'). The reverse operation can safely be
7411performed since no quote may appear anywhere else in the logs.
7412
7413
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020074148.7. Capturing HTTP cookies
7415---------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007416
7417Cookie capture simplifies the tracking a complete user session. This can be
7418achieved using the "capture cookie" statement in the frontend. Please refer to
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007419section 4.2 for more details. Only one cookie can be captured, and the same
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007420cookie will simultaneously be checked in the request ("Cookie:" header) and in
7421the response ("Set-Cookie:" header). The respective values will be reported in
7422the HTTP logs at the "captured_request_cookie" and "captured_response_cookie"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007423locations (see section 8.2.3 about HTTP log format). When either cookie is
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007424not seen, a dash ('-') replaces the value. This way, it's easy to detect when a
7425user switches to a new session for example, because the server will reassign it
7426a new cookie. It is also possible to detect if a server unexpectedly sets a
7427wrong cookie to a client, leading to session crossing.
7428
7429 Examples :
7430 # capture the first cookie whose name starts with "ASPSESSION"
7431 capture cookie ASPSESSION len 32
7432
7433 # capture the first cookie whose name is exactly "vgnvisitor"
7434 capture cookie vgnvisitor= len 32
7435
7436
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020074378.8. Capturing HTTP headers
7438---------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007439
7440Header captures are useful to track unique request identifiers set by an upper
7441proxy, virtual host names, user-agents, POST content-length, referrers, etc. In
7442the response, one can search for information about the response length, how the
7443server asked the cache to behave, or an object location during a redirection.
7444
7445Header captures are performed using the "capture request header" and "capture
7446response header" statements in the frontend. Please consult their definition in
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007447section 4.2 for more details.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007448
7449It is possible to include both request headers and response headers at the same
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007450time. Non-existent headers are logged as empty strings, and if one header
7451appears more than once, only its last occurrence will be logged. Request headers
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007452are grouped within braces '{' and '}' in the same order as they were declared,
7453and delimited with a vertical bar '|' without any space. Response headers
7454follow the same representation, but are displayed after a space following the
7455request headers block. These blocks are displayed just before the HTTP request
7456in the logs.
7457
7458 Example :
7459 # This instance chains to the outgoing proxy
7460 listen proxy-out
7461 mode http
7462 option httplog
7463 option logasap
7464 log global
7465 server cache1 192.168.1.1:3128
7466
7467 # log the name of the virtual server
7468 capture request header Host len 20
7469
7470 # log the amount of data uploaded during a POST
7471 capture request header Content-Length len 10
7472
7473 # log the beginning of the referrer
7474 capture request header Referer len 20
7475
7476 # server name (useful for outgoing proxies only)
7477 capture response header Server len 20
7478
7479 # logging the content-length is useful with "option logasap"
7480 capture response header Content-Length len 10
7481
7482 # log the expected cache behaviour on the response
7483 capture response header Cache-Control len 8
7484
7485 # the Via header will report the next proxy's name
7486 capture response header Via len 20
7487
7488 # log the URL location during a redirection
7489 capture response header Location len 20
7490
7491 >>> Aug 9 20:26:09 localhost \
7492 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34014 [09/Aug/2004:20:26:09] proxy-out \
7493 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/0/162/+162 200 +350 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7494 {fr.adserver.yahoo.co||http://fr.f416.mail.} {|864|private||} \
7495 "GET http://fr.adserver.yahoo.com/"
7496
7497 >>> Aug 9 20:30:46 localhost \
7498 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34020 [09/Aug/2004:20:30:46] proxy-out \
7499 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/0/182/+182 200 +279 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7500 {w.ods.org||} {Formilux/0.1.8|3495|||} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007501 "GET http://trafic.1wt.eu/ HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007502
7503 >>> Aug 9 20:30:46 localhost \
7504 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34028 [09/Aug/2004:20:30:46] proxy-out \
7505 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/2/126/+128 301 +223 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7506 {www.sytadin.equipement.gouv.fr||http://trafic.1wt.eu/} \
7507 {Apache|230|||http://www.sytadin.} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007508 "GET http://www.sytadin.equipement.gouv.fr/ HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007509
7510
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020075118.9. Examples of logs
7512---------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007513
7514These are real-world examples of logs accompanied with an explanation. Some of
7515them have been made up by hand. The syslog part has been removed for better
7516reading. Their sole purpose is to explain how to decipher them.
7517
7518 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33318 [15/Oct/2003:08:31:57.130] px-http \
7519 px-http/srv1 6559/0/7/147/6723 200 243 - - ---- 5/3/3/1/0 0/0 \
7520 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
7521
7522 => long request (6.5s) entered by hand through 'telnet'. The server replied
7523 in 147 ms, and the session ended normally ('----')
7524
7525 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33319 [15/Oct/2003:08:31:57.149] px-http \
7526 px-http/srv1 6559/1230/7/147/6870 200 243 - - ---- 324/239/239/99/0 \
7527 0/9 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
7528
7529 => Idem, but the request was queued in the global queue behind 9 other
7530 requests, and waited there for 1230 ms.
7531
7532 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33320 [15/Oct/2003:08:32:17.654] px-http \
7533 px-http/srv1 9/0/7/14/+30 200 +243 - - ---- 3/3/3/1/0 0/0 \
7534 "GET /image.iso HTTP/1.0"
7535
7536 => request for a long data transfer. The "logasap" option was specified, so
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007537 the log was produced just before transferring data. The server replied in
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007538 14 ms, 243 bytes of headers were sent to the client, and total time from
7539 accept to first data byte is 30 ms.
7540
7541 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33320 [15/Oct/2003:08:32:17.925] px-http \
7542 px-http/srv1 9/0/7/14/30 502 243 - - PH-- 3/2/2/0/0 0/0 \
7543 "GET /cgi-bin/bug.cgi? HTTP/1.0"
7544
7545 => the proxy blocked a server response either because of an "rspdeny" or
7546 "rspideny" filter, or because the response was improperly formatted and
7547 not HTTP-compliant, or because it blocked sensible information which
7548 risked being cached. In this case, the response is replaced with a "502
7549 bad gateway". The flags ("PH--") tell us that it was haproxy who decided
7550 to return the 502 and not the server.
7551
7552 >>> haproxy[18113]: 127.0.0.1:34548 [15/Oct/2003:15:18:55.798] px-http \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007553 px-http/<NOSRV> -1/-1/-1/-1/8490 -1 0 - - CR-- 2/2/2/0/0 0/0 ""
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007554
7555 => the client never completed its request and aborted itself ("C---") after
7556 8.5s, while the proxy was waiting for the request headers ("-R--").
7557 Nothing was sent to any server.
7558
7559 >>> haproxy[18113]: 127.0.0.1:34549 [15/Oct/2003:15:19:06.103] px-http \
7560 px-http/<NOSRV> -1/-1/-1/-1/50001 408 0 - - cR-- 2/2/2/0/0 0/0 ""
7561
7562 => The client never completed its request, which was aborted by the
7563 time-out ("c---") after 50s, while the proxy was waiting for the request
7564 headers ("-R--"). Nothing was sent to any server, but the proxy could
7565 send a 408 return code to the client.
7566
7567 >>> haproxy[18989]: 127.0.0.1:34550 [15/Oct/2003:15:24:28.312] px-tcp \
7568 px-tcp/srv1 0/0/5007 0 cD 0/0/0/0/0 0/0
7569
7570 => This log was produced with "option tcplog". The client timed out after
7571 5 seconds ("c----").
7572
7573 >>> haproxy[18989]: 10.0.0.1:34552 [15/Oct/2003:15:26:31.462] px-http \
7574 px-http/srv1 3183/-1/-1/-1/11215 503 0 - - SC-- 205/202/202/115/3 \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007575 0/0 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007576
7577 => The request took 3s to complete (probably a network problem), and the
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007578 connection to the server failed ('SC--') after 4 attempts of 2 seconds
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007579 (config says 'retries 3'), and no redispatch (otherwise we would have
7580 seen "/+3"). Status code 503 was returned to the client. There were 115
7581 connections on this server, 202 connections on this proxy, and 205 on
7582 the global process. It is possible that the server refused the
7583 connection because of too many already established.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01007584
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007585
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020075869. Statistics and monitoring
7587----------------------------
7588
7589It is possible to query HAProxy about its status. The most commonly used
7590mechanism is the HTTP statistics page. This page also exposes an alternative
7591CSV output format for monitoring tools. The same format is provided on the
7592Unix socket.
7593
7594
75959.1. CSV format
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007596---------------
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007597
Willy Tarreau7f062c42009-03-05 18:43:00 +01007598The statistics may be consulted either from the unix socket or from the HTTP
7599page. Both means provide a CSV format whose fields follow.
7600
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007601 0. pxname: proxy name
7602 1. svname: service name (FRONTEND for frontend, BACKEND for backend, any name
7603 for server)
7604 2. qcur: current queued requests
7605 3. qmax: max queued requests
7606 4. scur: current sessions
7607 5. smax: max sessions
7608 6. slim: sessions limit
7609 7. stot: total sessions
7610 8. bin: bytes in
7611 9. bout: bytes out
7612 10. dreq: denied requests
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007613 11. dresp: denied responses
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007614 12. ereq: request errors
7615 13. econ: connection errors
Willy Tarreauae526782010-03-04 20:34:23 +01007616 14. eresp: response errors (among which srv_abrt)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007617 15. wretr: retries (warning)
7618 16. wredis: redispatches (warning)
Cyril Bonté0dae5852010-02-03 00:26:28 +01007619 17. status: status (UP/DOWN/NOLB/MAINT/MAINT(via)...)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007620 18. weight: server weight (server), total weight (backend)
7621 19. act: server is active (server), number of active servers (backend)
7622 20. bck: server is backup (server), number of backup servers (backend)
7623 21. chkfail: number of failed checks
7624 22. chkdown: number of UP->DOWN transitions
7625 23. lastchg: last status change (in seconds)
7626 24. downtime: total downtime (in seconds)
7627 25. qlimit: queue limit
7628 26. pid: process id (0 for first instance, 1 for second, ...)
7629 27. iid: unique proxy id
7630 28. sid: service id (unique inside a proxy)
7631 29. throttle: warm up status
7632 30. lbtot: total number of times a server was selected
7633 31. tracked: id of proxy/server if tracking is enabled
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02007634 32. type (0=frontend, 1=backend, 2=server, 3=socket)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkidb57c6b2009-08-31 21:23:27 +02007635 33. rate: number of sessions per second over last elapsed second
7636 34. rate_lim: limit on new sessions per second
7637 35. rate_max: max number of new sessions per second
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki09605412009-09-23 22:09:24 +02007638 36. check_status: status of last health check, one of:
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01007639 UNK -> unknown
7640 INI -> initializing
7641 SOCKERR -> socket error
7642 L4OK -> check passed on layer 4, no upper layers testing enabled
7643 L4TMOUT -> layer 1-4 timeout
7644 L4CON -> layer 1-4 connection problem, for example
7645 "Connection refused" (tcp rst) or "No route to host" (icmp)
7646 L6OK -> check passed on layer 6
7647 L6TOUT -> layer 6 (SSL) timeout
7648 L6RSP -> layer 6 invalid response - protocol error
7649 L7OK -> check passed on layer 7
7650 L7OKC -> check conditionally passed on layer 7, for example 404 with
7651 disable-on-404
7652 L7TOUT -> layer 7 (HTTP/SMTP) timeout
7653 L7RSP -> layer 7 invalid response - protocol error
7654 L7STS -> layer 7 response error, for example HTTP 5xx
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki09605412009-09-23 22:09:24 +02007655 37. check_code: layer5-7 code, if available
7656 38. check_duration: time in ms took to finish last health check
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007657 39. hrsp_1xx: http responses with 1xx code
7658 40. hrsp_2xx: http responses with 2xx code
7659 41. hrsp_3xx: http responses with 3xx code
7660 42. hrsp_4xx: http responses with 4xx code
7661 43. hrsp_5xx: http responses with 5xx code
7662 44. hrsp_other: http responses with other codes (protocol error)
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01007663 45. hanafail: failed health checks details
7664 46. req_rate: HTTP requests per second over last elapsed second
7665 47. req_rate_max: max number of HTTP requests per second observed
7666 48. req_tot: total number of HTTP requests received
Willy Tarreauae526782010-03-04 20:34:23 +01007667 49. cli_abrt: number of data transfers aborted by the client
7668 50. srv_abrt: number of data transfers aborted by the server (inc. in eresp)
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01007669
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007670
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020076719.2. Unix Socket commands
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007672-------------------------
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007673
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007674The following commands are supported on the UNIX stats socket ; all of them
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007675must be terminated by a line feed. The socket supports pipelining, so that it
7676is possible to chain multiple commands at once provided they are delimited by
7677a semi-colon or a line feed, although the former is more reliable as it has no
7678risk of being truncated over the network. The responses themselves will each be
7679followed by an empty line, so it will be easy for an external script to match a
7680given response with a given request. By default one command line is processed
7681then the connection closes, but there is an interactive allowing multiple lines
7682to be issued one at a time.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007683
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007684It is important to understand that when multiple haproxy processes are started
7685on the same sockets, any process may pick up the request and will output its
7686own stats.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007687
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01007688clear counters
7689 Clear the max values of the statistics counters in each proxy (frontend &
7690 backend) and in each server. The cumulated counters are not affected. This
7691 can be used to get clean counters after an incident, without having to
7692 restart nor to clear traffic counters. This command is restricted and can
7693 only be issued on sockets configured for levels "operator" or "admin".
7694
7695clear counters all
7696 Clear all statistics counters in each proxy (frontend & backend) and in each
7697 server. This has the same effect as restarting. This command is restricted
7698 and can only be issued on sockets configured for level "admin".
7699
7700disable server <backend>/<server>
7701 Mark the server DOWN for maintenance. In this mode, no more checks will be
7702 performed on the server until it leaves maintenance.
7703 If the server is tracked by other servers, those servers will be set to DOWN
7704 during the maintenance.
7705
7706 In the statistics page, a server DOWN for maintenance will appear with a
7707 "MAINT" status, its tracking servers with the "MAINT(via)" one.
7708
7709 Both the backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by
7710 their numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
7711
7712 This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for
7713 level "admin".
7714
7715enable server <backend>/<server>
7716 If the server was previously marked as DOWN for maintenance, this marks the
7717 server UP and checks are re-enabled.
7718
7719 Both the backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by
7720 their numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
7721
7722 This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for
7723 level "admin".
7724
7725get weight <backend>/<server>
7726 Report the current weight and the initial weight of server <server> in
7727 backend <backend> or an error if either doesn't exist. The initial weight is
7728 the one that appears in the configuration file. Both are normally equal
7729 unless the current weight has been changed. Both the backend and the server
7730 may be specified either by their name or by their numeric ID, prefixed with a
7731 dash ('#').
7732
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007733help
7734 Print the list of known keywords and their basic usage. The same help screen
7735 is also displayed for unknown commands.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007736
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007737prompt
7738 Toggle the prompt at the beginning of the line and enter or leave interactive
7739 mode. In interactive mode, the connection is not closed after a command
7740 completes. Instead, the prompt will appear again, indicating the user that
7741 the interpreter is waiting for a new command. The prompt consists in a right
7742 angle bracket followed by a space "> ". This mode is particularly convenient
7743 when one wants to periodically check information such as stats or errors.
7744 It is also a good idea to enter interactive mode before issuing a "help"
7745 command.
7746
7747quit
7748 Close the connection when in interactive mode.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007749
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01007750set timeout cli <delay>
7751 Change the CLI interface timeout for current connection. This can be useful
7752 during long debugging sessions where the user needs to constantly inspect
7753 some indicators without being disconnected. The delay is passed in seconds.
7754
7755set weight <backend>/<server> <weight>[%]
7756 Change a server's weight to the value passed in argument. If the value ends
7757 with the '%' sign, then the new weight will be relative to the initially
7758 configured weight. Relative weights are only permitted between 0 and 100%,
7759 and absolute weights are permitted between 0 and 256. Servers which are part
7760 of a farm running a static load-balancing algorithm have stricter limitations
7761 because the weight cannot change once set. Thus for these servers, the only
7762 accepted values are 0 and 100% (or 0 and the initial weight). Changes take
7763 effect immediately, though certain LB algorithms require a certain amount of
7764 requests to consider changes. A typical usage of this command is to disable
7765 a server during an update by setting its weight to zero, then to enable it
7766 again after the update by setting it back to 100%. This command is restricted
7767 and can only be issued on sockets configured for level "admin". Both the
7768 backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by their
7769 numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
7770
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007771show errors [<iid>]
7772 Dump last known request and response errors collected by frontends and
7773 backends. If <iid> is specified, the limit the dump to errors concerning
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02007774 either frontend or backend whose ID is <iid>. This command is restricted
7775 and can only be issued on sockets configured for levels "operator" or
7776 "admin".
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007777
7778 The errors which may be collected are the last request and response errors
7779 caused by protocol violations, often due to invalid characters in header
7780 names. The report precisely indicates what exact character violated the
7781 protocol. Other important information such as the exact date the error was
7782 detected, frontend and backend names, the server name (when known), the
7783 internal session ID and the source address which has initiated the session
7784 are reported too.
7785
7786 All characters are returned, and non-printable characters are encoded. The
7787 most common ones (\t = 9, \n = 10, \r = 13 and \e = 27) are encoded as one
7788 letter following a backslash. The backslash itself is encoded as '\\' to
7789 avoid confusion. Other non-printable characters are encoded '\xNN' where
7790 NN is the two-digits hexadecimal representation of the character's ASCII
7791 code.
7792
7793 Lines are prefixed with the position of their first character, starting at 0
7794 for the beginning of the buffer. At most one input line is printed per line,
7795 and large lines will be broken into multiple consecutive output lines so that
7796 the output never goes beyond 79 characters wide. It is easy to detect if a
7797 line was broken, because it will not end with '\n' and the next line's offset
7798 will be followed by a '+' sign, indicating it is a continuation of previous
7799 line.
7800
7801 Example :
7802 >>> $ echo "show errors" | socat stdio /tmp/sock1
7803 [04/Mar/2009:15:46:56.081] backend http-in (#2) : invalid response
7804 src 127.0.0.1, session #54, frontend fe-eth0 (#1), server s2 (#1)
7805 response length 213 bytes, error at position 23:
7806
7807 00000 HTTP/1.0 200 OK\r\n
7808 00017 header/bizarre:blah\r\n
7809 00038 Location: blah\r\n
7810 00054 Long-line: this is a very long line which should b
7811 00104+ e broken into multiple lines on the output buffer,
7812 00154+ otherwise it would be too large to print in a ter
7813 00204+ minal\r\n
7814 00211 \r\n
7815
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007816 In the example above, we see that the backend "http-in" which has internal
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007817 ID 2 has blocked an invalid response from its server s2 which has internal
7818 ID 1. The request was on session 54 initiated by source 127.0.0.1 and
7819 received by frontend fe-eth0 whose ID is 1. The total response length was
7820 213 bytes when the error was detected, and the error was at byte 23. This
7821 is the slash ('/') in header name "header/bizarre", which is not a valid
7822 HTTP character for a header name.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007823
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007824show info
7825 Dump info about haproxy status on current process.
7826
7827show sess
7828 Dump all known sessions. Avoid doing this on slow connections as this can
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02007829 be huge. This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets
7830 configured for levels "operator" or "admin".
7831
Willy Tarreau66dc20a2010-03-05 17:53:32 +01007832show sess <id>
7833 Display a lot of internal information about the specified session identifier.
7834 This identifier is the first field at the beginning of the lines in the dumps
7835 of "show sess" (it corresponds to the session pointer). Those information are
7836 useless to most users but may be used by haproxy developers to troubleshoot a
7837 complex bug. The output format is intentionally not documented so that it can
7838 freely evolve depending on demands.
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007839
7840show stat [<iid> <type> <sid>]
7841 Dump statistics in the CSV format. By passing <id>, <type> and <sid>, it is
7842 possible to dump only selected items :
7843 - <iid> is a proxy ID, -1 to dump everything
7844 - <type> selects the type of dumpable objects : 1 for frontends, 2 for
7845 backends, 4 for servers, -1 for everything. These values can be ORed,
7846 for example:
7847 1 + 2 = 3 -> frontend + backend.
7848 1 + 2 + 4 = 7 -> frontend + backend + server.
7849 - <sid> is a server ID, -1 to dump everything from the selected proxy.
7850
7851 Example :
7852 >>> $ echo "show info;show stat" | socat stdio unix-connect:/tmp/sock1
7853 Name: HAProxy
7854 Version: 1.4-dev2-49
7855 Release_date: 2009/09/23
7856 Nbproc: 1
7857 Process_num: 1
7858 (...)
7859
7860 # pxname,svname,qcur,qmax,scur,smax,slim,stot,bin,bout,dreq, (...)
7861 stats,FRONTEND,,,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,0,,,,,OPEN,,,,,,,,,1,1,0, (...)
7862 stats,BACKEND,0,0,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,,0,0,0,0,UP,0,0,0,,0,250,(...)
7863 (...)
7864 www1,BACKEND,0,0,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,,0,0,0,0,UP,1,1,0,,0,250, (...)
7865
7866 $
7867
7868 Here, two commands have been issued at once. That way it's easy to find
7869 which process the stats apply to in multi-process mode. Notice the empty
7870 line after the information output which marks the end of the first block.
7871 A similar empty line appears at the end of the second block (stats) so that
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007872 the reader knows the output has not been truncated.
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007873
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki719e7262009-10-04 15:02:46 +02007874
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01007875/*
7876 * Local variables:
7877 * fill-column: 79
7878 * End:
7879 */